Abrahams decease A meditation on Genesis 25.8. Deliuered at the funerall of that worthy seruant of Christ, Mr. Richard Stock, late pastor of All-Hallowes Bread-street: together with the testimonie then giuen vnto him. By Thomas Gataker B. of D. and pastor of Rotherhith.
         Gataker, Thomas, 1574-1654.
      
       
         
           1627
        
      
       Approx. 186 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 38 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-11 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A01523
         STC 11647
         ESTC S102880
         99838642
         99838642
         3028
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A01523)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 3028)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1099:05)
      
       
         
           
             Abrahams decease A meditation on Genesis 25.8. Deliuered at the funerall of that worthy seruant of Christ, Mr. Richard Stock, late pastor of All-Hallowes Bread-street: together with the testimonie then giuen vnto him. By Thomas Gataker B. of D. and pastor of Rotherhith.
             Gataker, Thomas, 1574-1654.
          
           [6], 62, [2] p.
           
             Printed by Iohn Haviland for Fulke Clifton, and are to be sold at his shop on New-fishstreet hill, vnder St. Margarets Church, at the signe of the holy Lambe,
             London :
             1627.
          
           
             With a final errata leaf.
             Reproduction of the original in the British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Stock, Richard, 1569?-1626.
           Sermons, English -- 17th century.
           Funeral sermons.
        
      
    
     
        2004-08 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-08 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-09 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-09 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           ABRAHAMS
           DECEASE
           .
           A
           MEDITATION
           ON
           GENESIS
           25.
           8.
           
           DELIVERED
           AT
           THE
           FVNERALL
           OF
           THAT
           WORTHY
           SERuant
           of
           Christ
           ,
           Mr.
           RICHARD
           STOCK
           ,
           Late
           Pastor
           of
           All-Hallowes
           Bread-street
           :
           TOGETHER
           WITH
           THE
           TESTIMOnie
           then
           giuen
           vnto
           him
           .
        
         
           By
           THOMAS
           GATAKER
           B.
           of
           D.
           and
           Pastor
           of
           Rotherhith
           .
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           by
           
             Iohn
             Haviland
          
           for
           
             Fulke
             Clifton
          
           ,
           and
           are
           to
           be
           sold
           at
           his
           shop
           on
           New-fishstreet
           hill
           ,
           vnder
           St.
           Margarets
           Church
           ,
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           holy
           Lambe
           .
           1627.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           RIGHT
           WORSHIPFVLL
           SIR
           HENRY
           YELVERTON
           Knight
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Iustices
           of
           his
           Maiesties
           Court
           of
           
             Common
             Pleas.
          
           
        
         
           
             RIGHT
             WORSHIPFVLL
             ;
          
        
         
           YOVR
           
             speciall
             interest
          
           in
           that
           
             worthy
             Seruant
          
           of
           Christ
           ,
           whom
           this
           
             weak
             work
          
           concerneth
           ,
           by
           your
           
             singular
             fauours
          
           to
           him
           and
           his
           deseruedly
           procured
           ,
           cānot
           but
           giue
           you
           interest
           in
           the
           worke
           it selfe
           before
           any
           .
           Vnto
           your
           Worship
           therefore
           I
           addresse
           
           and
           direct
           it
           ,
           as
           to
           one
           that
           may
           iustly
           lay
           
             best
             claime
          
           to
           it
           :
           Not
           doubting
           but
           that
           ,
           as
           you
           did
           in
           more
           than
           ordinary
           manner
           respect
           his
           person
           while
           he
           liued
           ,
           so
           you
           do
           no
           lesse
           honour
           the
           memory
           of
           him
           now
           deceased
           .
           The
           worke
           I
           wish
           were
           worthy
           either
           you
           or
           him
           .
           But
           ,
           how
           little
           time
           I
           had
           for
           the
           composing
           and
           
             peecing
             vp
          
           of
           these
           
             broken
             Meditations
          
           ,
           cannot
           be
           vnknowne
           to
           those
           ,
           &
           from
           them
           may
           be
           made
           knowne
           to
           others
           ,
           that
           either
           sent
           or
           brought
           me
           the
           
             first
             word
          
           of
           his
           decease
           ,
           being
           newly
           allighted
           from
           a
           
             wearisome
             iourney
          
           ,
           not
           aboue
           
             two
             daies
          
           before
           the
           Funerall
           was
           to
           be
           performed
           .
           Besides
           that
           so
           sudden
           and
           vnexpected
           tidings
           of
           the
           losse
           of
           so
           deare
           a
           Friend
           ,
           causing
           much
           griefe
           and
           distractiō
           ,
           could
           not
           but
           produce
           withall
           as
           great
           an
           indisposition
           to
           the
           minding
           of
           that
           that
           this
           office
           imposed
           on
           me
           did
           necessarily
           require
           of
           me
           ;
           and
           defeat
           consequently
           that
           second
           a
           helpe
           of
           
             redoubled
             diligence
          
           ,
        
         
           which
           others
           are
           wont
           to
           vse
           (
           as
           the
           sea-man
           his
           b
           oares
           ,
           when
           the
           wind
           slacketh
           or
           scanteth
           )
           to
           redeeme
           the
           want
           of
           time
           with
           .
           That
           which
           made
           me
           (
           as
           conscious
           of
           the
           rawnesse
           of
           it
           )
           the
           more
           backward
           at
           
           first
           to
           yeeld
           to
           the
           importunitie
           of
           those
           ,
           (
           not
           a
           few
           )
           who
           both
           by
           letters
           and
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           were
           very
           instant
           and
           vrgent
           for
           the
           publishing
           of
           it
           .
           Nor
           haue
           I
           had
           much
           loisure
           since
           to
           reuise
           and
           digest
           my
           
             confused
             notes
          
           ;
           nor
           yet
           desire
           to
           adde
           or
           alter
           much
           ,
           lest
           (
           to
           those
           that
           then
           heard
           it
           )
           it
           might
           seeme
           not
           the
           same
           .
           One
           short
           passage
           or
           two
           onely
           I
           haue
           inserted
           ,
           that
           my
           memory
           then
           failed
           me
           in
           .
           Else
           the
           substance
           of
           all
           here
           was
           then
           deliuered
           .
           Which
           if
           ,
           especially
           in
           the
           Testimony
           then
           giuē
           vnto
           him
           ,
           whom
           this
           office
           was
           performed
           vnto
           ,
           it
           seeme
           slight
           and
           slender
           ,
           to
           that
           it
           ought
           or
           might
           haue
           beene
           :
           Besides
           the
           former
           considerations
           ,
           which
           might
           well
           sufficiently
           excuse
           ,
           let
           it
           be
           remembred
           ;
           what
           a
           great
           Oratour
           sometime
           said
           ,
           that
           c
           
             An
             exact
             face
             is
             very
             seldome
             drawn
             but
             with
             much
             disaduantage
             :
          
           how
           much
           more
           when
           
             a
             bungler
          
           but
           hath
           it
           in
           hand
           ?
           I
           may
           well
           say
           of
           him
           ,
           as
           he
           sometime
           of
           Basile
           ,
           d
           
             There
             wanted
             but
             his
             owne
             tongue
             to
             commend
             him
             with
             .
          
           A
           better
           I
           wish
           there
           had
           been
           employed
           therin
           than
           mine
           owne
           ;
           or
           that
           mine
           owne
           (
           if
           but
           for
           his
           sake
           )
           had
           (
           at
           least
           then
           )
           been
           better
           .
           But
           the
           
           best
           is
           ,
           
             The
             Sea
             needs
             not
             the
             Riuers
             ,
             that
          
           
           
             yet
             runne
             into
             it
          
           ;
           nor
           he
           either
           mine
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           mans
           praise
           ;
           that
           due
           honour
           and
           reuerent
           estimation
           of
           him
           remaining
           in
           the
           mindes
           of
           so
           many
           ,
           that
           neither
           mine
           ,
           nor
           any
           other
           mans
           ,
           commendation
           of
           him
           ,
           either
           need
           to
           adde
           ought
           ,
           or
           can
           adde
           much
           therunto
           .
           Howbeit
           this
           may
           bide
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           gone
           .
           Which
           whatsoeuer
           it
           is
           ,
           presuming
           that
           
             your
             Worship
          
           will
           accept
           of
           ,
           if
           not
           for
           it
           owne
           sake
           ,
           yet
           for
           his
           ,
           who
           liueth
           yet
           with
           you
           ,
           and
           you
           desire
           (
           I
           know
           )
           should
           doe
           so
           also
           with
           others
           ,
           I
           recommend
           it
           to
           your
           patronage
           ,
           and
           your selfe
           with
           
             all
             yours
          
           to
           the
           protection
           of
           him
           who
           hath
           promised
           to
           be
           f
           Sunne
           and
           Shield
           to
           all
           those
           that
           sincerely
           rely
           on
           him
           ;
           and
           rest
           .
        
         
           
             Your
             Worships
             to
             be
             commanded
             in
             the
             Lord
             Iesus
             ,
             THO.
             GATAKER
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           THE
           TESTIMONIE
           GIVEN
           TO
           THAT
           worthy
           Seruant
           of
           CHRIST
           ,
           Master
           RICHARD
           STOCK
           ,
           at
           his
           Funerall
           .
        
         
           ALL
           a
           
             Christian
             mens
             bodies
          
           are
           b
           Members
           of
           
             Christs
             Body
          
           ,
           c
           and
           Temples
           of
           
             Gods
             Spirit
          
           ;
           and
           are
           therefore
           in
           decent
           and
           comely
           manner
           to
           be
           laid
           vp
           in
           their
           d
           
             sleeping
             chambers
          
           or
           their
           e
           
             resting
             places
          
           ,
           as
           the
           Prophet
           Esay
           termeth
           them
           .
           A
           decent
           and
           
             comely
             Sepulture
          
           then
           is
           due
           to
           all
           
             Christian
             corps
          
           .
           But
           more
           then
           so
           ,
           with
           some
           solemnitie
           may
           this
           office
           well
           bee
           performed
           to
           those
           ,
           in
           whom
           the
           
             Holy
             Ghost
          
           manifested
           a
           more
           speciall
           residence
           by
           f
           a
           more
           plentifull
           measure
           of
           spirituall
           endowments
           ,
           and
           more
           powerfull
           operations
           
           flowing
           from
           the
           same
           ,
           while
           they
           liued
           ;
           and
           whom
           ,
           hauing
           obtained
           g
           a
           more
           eminent
           place
           in
           
             Christs
             body
             ,
             God
          
           hath
           made
           instruments
           of
           more
           than
           ordinary
           good
           to
           his
           portion
           and
           people
           here
           .
           h
           
             Samuel
             dyed
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Storie
           )
           i
           a
           
             Prophet
             of
             God
          
           ,
           k
           and
           
             Ruler
             of
             Gods
             people
             ,
             and
             all
             Israel
             assembled
             to
             his
             buriall
             ,
          
           and
           
             mourned
             for
             him
          
           .
        
         
           This
           being
           apparant
           ,
           good
           ground
           there
           is
           for
           this
           
             solemne
             Assemblie
          
           ,
           which
           the
           decease
           of
           our
           right
           worthy
           ,
           and
           deseruedly
           beloued
           ,
           and
           much
           respected
           
             Christian
             Brother
          
           ,
           M.
           RICHARD
           STOCK
           ,
           a
           graue
           and
           reuerend
           Father
           in
           this
           our
           Church
           ,
           a
           faithfull
           Minister
           and
           seruant
           of
           
             Iesus
             Christ
          
           ,
           and
           the
           vigilant
           Pastor
           of
           a
           neighbouring
           Congregation
           ,
           for
           the
           performance
           of
           this
           last
           
             Christian
             office
          
           to
           the
           l
           remainders
           of
           him
           with
           vs
           ,
           hath
           occasioned
           at
           this
           present
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           whom
           &
           his
           deportments
           ,
           howsoeuer
           very
           much
           might
           iustly
           be
           spoken
           ,
           and
           be
           spoken
           iustly
           by
           my selfe
           ,
           not
           frō
           others
           reports
           ,
           but
           of
           mine
           own
           knowledge
           ,
           hauing
           bin
           m
           an
           
             eye
             witnesse
          
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           hauing
           beene
           familiarly
           and
           inwardly
           acquainted
           with
           him
           ever
           since
           the
           
             fourth
             yeere
          
           of
           
             his
             abode
          
           in
           the
           Schooles
           of
           the
           Prophets
           ,
           and
           shortly
           after
           the
           time
           of
           
             my
             first
             accesse
          
           thither
           ;
           (
           for
           there
           was
           no
           more
           distance
           betweene
           our
           two
           standings
           )
           yet
           neither
           will
           the
           streights
           of
           time
           permit
           it
           ,
           nor
           will
           it
           be
           very
           needfull
           so
           to
           doe
           ;
           his
           life
           ,
           and
           courses
           ,
           and
           
             constant
             labour
          
           in
           the
           worke
           of
           the
           Word
           ,
           being
           so
           well
           knowne
           ,
           not
           in
           this
           ,
           or
           the
           neighbour
           places
           onely
           ,
           but
           thorow-out
           the
           whole
           City
           ,
           wherein
           he
           constantly
           continued
           the
           worke
           
           of
           his
           Ministery
           by
           the
           space
           of
           well
           neere
           thirty
           yeeres
           .
           I
           will
           endeuour
           therefore
           to
           contract
           (
           what
           I
           well
           may
           )
           that
           which
           I
           shall
           speake
           of
           him
           ,
           and
           hasten
           to
           those
           things
           that
           more
           neerely
           concerne
           our selues
           .
        
         
           And
           to
           beginne
           with
           the
           times
           of
           my
           
             first
             notice
          
           of
           him
           .
           As
           in
           his
           first
           beginnings
           he
           was
           of
           
             eminent
             note
          
           in
           the
           Colledge
           he
           liued
           in
           ,
           both
           for
           his
           
             vnweariable
             industry
          
           ,
           and
           his
           
             singular
             proficiency
          
           in
           those
           studies
           of
           humanitie
           ,
           that
           are
           as
           n
           handmaids
           to
           Diuinity
           ,
           and
           helpe
           to
           lay
           a
           good
           ground
           for
           any
           future
           profession
           ;
           So
           his
           care
           was
           so
           o
           to
           
             entertwine
             pletie
          
           and
           humanitie
           the
           one
           with
           the
           other
           ,
           that
           p
           as
           web
           and
           woofe
           they
           ranne
           on
           euer
           along
           together
           through
           the
           whole
           course
           of
           his
           studies
           .
           Nor
           was
           he
           carefull
           onely
           of
           this
           practise
           himselfe
           ,
           but
           (
           according
           to
           that
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           q
           
             Obserue
             one
             another
          
           ,
           r
           
             to
             whe●
             on
             to
             godlinesse
             and
             well-doing
             ;
             )
          
           hee
           was
           no
           lesse
           forward
           to
           incite
           others
           thereunto
           ;
           and
           not
           to
           incite
           them
           onely
           thereunto
           ,
           but
           to
           assist
           them
           therein
           ,
           and
           to
           afford
           what
           helps
           he
           could
           (
           which
           well
           also
           he
           could
           doe
           )
           unto
           any
           that
           were
           either
           desirous
           ,
           yea
           ,
           or
           willing
           ,
           but
           to
           imbrace
           them
           .
           In
           which
           kinde
           I
           cannot
           without
           iust
           note
           of
           ingratitude
           but
           acknowledge
           my selfe
           much
           indebted
           vnto
           him
           ;
           and
           haue
           cause
           (
           with
           many
           others
           ,
           beside
           my selfe
           ,
           much
           my
           betters
           )
           to
           
             blesse
             God
          
           that
           euer
           we
           came
           acquainted
           there
           with
           him
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           while
           he
           staied
           in
           the
           Colledge
           (
           which
           his
           desire
           was
           to
           haue
           done
           longer
           then
           he
           did
           ,
           if
           opportunity
           had
           serued
           )
           s
           he
           gaue
           before
           hand
           ,
           ere
           he
           came
           to
           it
           ,
           
             euident
             signes
          
           of
           one
           likely
           to
           proue
           
           t
           a
           
             skilfull
             Master-builder
          
           in
           
             Gods
             worke
          
           ,
           and
           u
           a
           winner
           of
           many
           soules
           to
           God.
           
        
         
           Nor
           was
           he
           one
           of
           those
           a
           
             rathe-ripe
             wits
          
           ,
           that
           promise
           faire
           in
           the
           blossome
           ,
           but
           faile
           in
           the
           fruit
           ;
           that
           like
           Comets
           ,
           blaze
           brighter
           than
           the
           fixed
           starres
           for
           a
           time
           ,
           but
           after
           a
           while
           vanish
           and
           come
           to
           nought
           ,
           the
           matter
           of
           them
           being
           wholly
           either
           spent
           or
           disperst
           .
           But
           his
           proceedings
           in
           publike
           were
           correspondent
           to
           his
           beginnings
           in
           priuate
           .
           When
           it
           pleased
           God
           b
           to
           call
           him
           out
           and
           set
           him
           apart
           to
           that
           imploiment
           that
           he
           had
           ordained
           him
           to
           before
           ,
           he
           proued
           
             a
             painfull
             ,
             a
             faithfull
             Minister
             of
             Christ
             ,
             a
             skilfull
             ,
             a
             powerfull
             dispenser
             of
             Gods
             Word
             .
          
           If
           any
           demand
           proofe
           hereof
           :
           not
           to
           insist
           vpon
           his
           constant
           and
           
             incessant
             imploiments
          
           ,
           with
           generall
           approbation
           and
           applause
           both
           of
           religious
           and
           iudicious
           ,
           continued
           for
           so
           many
           yeeres
           (
           as
           was
           before
           said
           )
           together
           ,
           not
           
             a
             Sabbath
          
           intermitted
           ,
           wherein
           (
           if
           health
           serued
           )
           he
           preached
           not
           twise
           ,
           either
           in
           his
           owne
           charge
           (
           where
           he
           was
           frequentest
           )
           or
           elsewhere
           abroad
           ;
           besides
           his
           catechisings
           of
           the
           younger
           sort
           at
           certaine
           times
           in
           the
           
             weeke
             dayes
          
           ,
           and
           other
           such
           offices
           as
           to
           the
           
             pastor
             all
             function
          
           are
           necessarily
           annexed
           ,
           and
           are
           priuately
           to
           bee
           performed
           ;
           wherein
           also
           he
           was
           no
           lesse
           diligent
           than
           in
           the
           execution
           of
           his
           
             publike
             Ministery
          
           .
           Not
           to
           insist
           (
           I
           say
           )
           upon
           this
           ;
           (
           which
           yet
           were
           sufficient
           proofe
           of
           it
           :
           )
           As
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           to
           the
           Corinthians
           ,
           c
           
             You
             are
          
           d
           
             the
             seale
             of
             my
             Apostleship
             ,
             and
          
           e
           my
           f
           
             letters
             testimoniall
          
           .
           So
           may
           I
           well
           say
           of
           this
           our
           reuerend
           Brother
           :
           So
           many
           
             Christian
             soules
          
           professing
           themselues
           to
           haue
           had
           their
           first
           effectuall
           
           calling
           and
           conuersion
           from
           him
           ,
           (
           in
           which
           kinde
           ,
           I
           suppose
           ,
           not
           many
           in
           this
           City
           may
           compare
           with
           him
           )
           besides
           the
           multitudes
           of
           those
           that
           acknowledge
           themselues
           to
           haue
           been
           
             edified
             ,
             built
             up
          
           ,
           and
           bettred
           by
           him
           ,
           are
           the
           seale
           of
           his
           calling
           ,
           and
           of
           g
           
             Christ
             speaking
             in
             him
          
           ,
           and
           not
           verball
           or
           vocall
           ,
           but
           
             reall
             letters
             testimoniall
          
           of
           the
           efficacy
           of
           his
           ministery
           ,
           through
           h
           
             Gods
             blessing
          
           thereupon
           .
        
         
           An
           i
           obscure
           Author
           saith
           ,
           that
           the
           Apostles
           were
           like
           Fishermen
           ,
           the
           succeeding
           Ministers
           like
           Huntsmen
           :
           k
           the
           Apostles
           like
           fishermen
           that
           catch
           many
           at
           
             one
             draught
          
           ;
           l
           the
           succeeding
           .
           Ministers
           like
           Huntsmen
           ,
           that
           with
           much
           toile
           and
           clamour
           ,
           running
           up
           and
           downe
           
             all
             day
          
           ,
           scarce
           take
           
             one
             Deere
          
           or
           Hare
           ere
           night
           .
           And
           such
           indeed
           is
           the
           hard
           condition
           of
           many
           of
           
             Gods
             seruants
          
           ,
           that
           notwithstanding
           their
           faithfull
           and
           
             painfull
             discharge
          
           of
           their
           duty
           ,
           they
           are
           enforced
           to
           complaine
           with
           the
           Prophet
           ,
           m
           
             who
             beleeueth
             our
             report
          
           ?
           and
           ,
           n
           
             I
             haue
             laboured
             in
             vaine
          
           ;
           scarce
           able
           to
           produce
           or
           instance
           in
           any
           one
           ,
           of
           whom
           they
           can
           with
           some
           good
           ground
           of
           assurance
           presume
           ,
           that
           they
           haue
           gained
           him
           at
           least
           
             to
             God.
          
           But
           well
           might
           this
           our
           Brother
           ,
           through
           
             Gods
             blessing
          
           vpon
           his
           labours
           ,
           stand
           out
           and
           say
           ,
           not
           of
           one
           or
           two
           ,
           but
           of
           troupes
           ,
           in
           the
           words
           of
           the
           same
           Prophet
           ,
           o
           
             Behold
             I
             and
             the
             Children
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             giuen
             me
          
           ;
           and
           with
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           p
           
             These
             haue
             I
             begotten
             to
             God
             by
             the
             Gospell
             of
             Christ
             Iesus
             .
          
        
         
           Yea
           more
           than
           that
           ;
           well
           assured
           I
           am
           ,
           that
           diuers
           now
           famous
           lights
           in
           
             Gods
             Church
          
           ,
           and
           
             faithfull
             Ministers
          
           of
           his
           Word
           ,
           doe
           professe
           to
           haue
           lighted
           
           their
           candles
           at
           his
           lampe
           ,
           yea
           some
           of
           them
           to
           haue
           receiued
           their
           
             first
             beginnings
          
           not
           of
           light
           only
           ,
           but
           of
           spirituall
           life
           and
           grace
           ,
           (
           without
           which
           all
           light
           be
           it
           neuer
           so
           great
           ,
           is
           
             no
             light
          
           ,
           but
           meere
           darknes
           )
           from
           his
           Ministery
           .
           It
           is
           no
           small
           honour
           for
           a
           man
           
             to
             winne
          
           ,
           and
           it
           were
           but
           ,
           
             any
             one
             soule
          
           :
           (
           q
           
             He
             hath
             saued
             a
             soule
          
           ,
           saith
           St.
           Iames
           ;
           as
           a
           matter
           worthy
           the
           glorying
           in
           .
           )
           For
           r
           to
           win
           
             a
             soule
          
           is
           to
           win
           more
           than
           the
           
             whole
             world
          
           againe
           is
           worth
           .
           But
           what
           an
           honour
           is
           it
           then
           to
           be
           ,
           not
           the
           winner
           of
           a
           soule
           ,
           but
           the
           winner
           of
           such
           as
           proue
           winners
           of
           soules
           ,
           and
           so
           s
           by
           winning
           of
           some
           one
           immediatly
           ,
           to
           be
           a
           mediate
           meanes
           of
           
             winning
             many
          
           others
           by
           him
           ?
           t
           
             They
             shall
             shine
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             as
             the
             Heauens
          
           ,
           u
           
             that
             instruct
             ;
             and
             they
          
           x
           
             that
             conuert
             others
             ,
             as
             the
             stars
             .
          
           And
           how
           gloriously
           then
           (
           suppose
           we
           )
           doth
           this
           our
           y
           blessed
           Brother
           z
           shine
           now
           
             in
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             God
          
           ,
           that
           was
           an
           instructer
           of
           those
           that
           were
           instructers
           of
           others
           ;
           that
           was
           a
           conuerter
           of
           those
           that
           were
           conuerters
           of
           others
           themselues
           ?
        
         
           Many
           then
           (
           as
           a
           the
           Holy
           Ghost
           saith
           of
           Iohn
           the
           Baptist
           )
           did
           this
           our
           Brother
           
             winne
             to
             the
             Lord.
             Many
          
           (
           I
           say
           )
           he
           wonne
           ;
           though
           all
           he
           could
           not
           :
           that
           was
           more
           then
           b
           the
           Apostle
           himselfe
           was
           able
           to
           doe
           .
           But
           many
           yet
           he
           wonne
           ,
           and
           his
           desire
           
           and
           endeuour
           (
           with
           c
           the
           same
           Apostle
           )
           was
           to
           
             win
             all
          
           ;
           his
           own
           especially
           ,
           of
           whom
           he
           vsed
           to
           protest
           ,
           that
           
             it
             was
             more
             comfort
             to
             him
             to
             winne
             one
             of
             them
             ,
             than
             to
             winne
             twenty
             other
             .
          
           But
           some
           
             refractary
             spirits
          
           (
           as
           d
           who
           almost
           doth
           not
           ?
           )
           he
           met
           withall
           ,
           that
           would
           not
           be
           reclaimed
           ;
           that
           by
           their
           
             crosse
             carriage
          
           were
           as
           e
           thornes
           in
           his
           eyes
           ,
           and
           as
           goad●s
           
           in
           his
           sides
           ,
           and
           f
           a
           vexation
           of
           heart
           to
           this
           faithfull
           seruant
           of
           Christ
           :
           Whom
           ,
           if
           any
           of
           them
           bee
           yet
           liuing
           ,
           the
           Lord
           vouchsafe
           mercy
           ,
           and
           
             better
             mindes
          
           to
           ,
           and
           g
           
             lay
             not
             this
             sinne
             of
             theirs
             to
             their
             charge
             .
          
           And
           if
           there
           be
           any
           of
           those
           that
           liued
           any
           long
           time
           under
           so
           painfull
           and
           powerfull
           a
           Ministery
           as
           his
           was
           ,
           that
           remaine
           still
           
             vnconuerted
             ,
             vnreclaimed
             ,
             vnreformed
          
           ,
           let
           them
           feare
           and
           beware
           of
           that
           dreadfull
           censure
           of
           the
           Apostle
           ,
           h
           
             If
             our
             Gospell
             be
             yet
             hid
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           And
           let
           such
           know
           ,
           that
           not
           i
           the
           dust
           of
           his
           feet
           ,
           but
           the
           sweat
           of
           his
           browes
           ,
           and
           the
           teares
           of
           his
           eyes
           ,
           and
           his
           k
           
             strength
             wasted
          
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           his
           
             spirits
             spent
          
           vpon
           them
           ,
           shall
           one
           day
           
             rise
             vp
             in
             iudgement
          
           against
           ●hem
           to
           make
           their
           doome
           l
           the
           heauier
           ,
           if
           by
           
             timely
             repentance
          
           it
           be
           not
           preuented
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           a
           man
           may
           
             winne
             others
          
           ,
           and
           yet
           
             lose
             himselfe
          
           ;
           m
           he
           may
           
             saue
             others
          
           ,
           and
           yet
           not
           
             saue
             himselfe
          
           :
           (
           n
           they
           may
           
             beget
             life
          
           in
           others
           ,
           that
           
             haue
             none
          
           in
           themselues
           .
           )
           The
           Word
           may
           
             worke
             by
          
           a
           man
           ,
           and
           yet
           not
           
             worke
             on
          
           him
           :
           He
           may
           be
           o
           like
           a
           treene
           or
           a
           stonegutter
           (
           saith
           Augustine
           )
           that
           
             conueigheth
             water
             into
             a
             garden
          
           ,
           but
           
             receiueth
             no
             benefit
          
           thereby
           it selfe
           ;
           or
           like
           p
           the
           hand
           on
           the
           
             high
             way
          
           that
           
             pointeth
             others
             the
             way
          
           ,
           which
           yet
           it
           
             neuer
             walketh
          
           it selfe
           ;
           or
           †
           like
           
             an
             Harpe
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Heathen
           man
           )
           that
           
             maketh
             others
             melody
          
           ,
           or
           *
           a
           Trumpet
           ,
           that
           
             soundeth
             loud
          
           ,
           but
           
             heareth
             nothing
          
           it selfe
           ;
           or
           “
           like
           
           to
           the
           
             baptisme
             water
          
           (
           saith
           Gregory
           )
           that
           
             helpes
             men
          
           to
           
             Heauen
             ward
          
           ,
           and
           goeth
           after
           
             downe
             to
             the
             sincke
          
           it selfe
           :
           He
           may
           q
           
             preach
             to
             others
          
           ,
           and
           
             not
             preach
             to
             himselfe
          
           ;
           he
           may
           
             conuert
             others
          
           ,
           and
           yet
           r
           prooue
           a
           s
           
             castaway
             himselfe
          
           .
           (
           And
           yet
           it
           is
           t
           seldome
           seene
           ,
           that
           much
           good
           is
           done
           ,
           where
           a
           due
           u
           concent
           is
           not
           betweene
           tongue
           and
           hand
           ,
           betweene
           lip
           and
           
             life
             .
          
           )
           This
           our
           Brother
           therefore
           was
           none
           of
           those
           x
           that
           
             say
             and
             doe
             not
          
           :
           but
           y
           as
           
             he
             taught
             ,
             he
          
           
           wrought
           :
           His
           z
           doctrine
           and
           his
           
             practise
             concurred
          
           ,
           and
           went
           hand
           in
           hand
           together
           :
           His
           actions
           were
           ,
           though
           a
           silent
           ,
           yet
           reall
           and
           
             effectuall
             Sermons
          
           of
           that
           he
           preached
           in
           the
           Pulpit
           :
           The
           course
           of
           his
           b
           life
           was
           consonant
           to
           the
           tenour
           of
           his
           teaching
           .
           And
           c
           both
           ioyning
           and
           conspiring
           in
           one
           ,
           were
           a
           
           meanes
           to
           draw
           on
           many
           ,
           who
           d
           by
           the
           one
           alone
           paraduenture
           had
           not
           easily
           beene
           wonne
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ;
           for
           his
           teaching
           ,
           I
           doubt
           not
           but
           that
           they
           will
           giue
           him
           the
           
             best
             testimony
          
           that
           heard
           him
           oftest
           ;
           and
           for
           his
           life
           they
           that
           knew
           him
           best
           .
           For
           he
           was
           not
           
             a
             flash
          
           ;
           one
           of
           those
           that
           
             shew
             all
          
           in
           
             a
             Sermon
          
           ,
           or
           that
           
             spend
             all
          
           vpon
           some
           
             one
             curious
             good
             worke
          
           ,
           that
           they
           minde
           to
           make
           their
           Master-piece
           .
           But
           both
           in
           his
           life
           and
           teaching
           he
           held
           on
           such
           a
           tenor
           ,
           that
           the
           more
           men
           ,
           e
           wise
           and
           iudicious
           at
           least
           ,
           were
           acquainted
           with
           either
           ,
           f
           the
           more
           they
           reuerenced
           and
           admired
           him
           for
           either
           .
        
         
           There
           are
           two
           things
           (
           saith
           one
           )
           that
           make
           
             a
             compleat
             man.
          
           g
           ●ntegritie
           and
           Iudgement
           :
           the
           one
           whereof
           〈◊〉
           but
           h
           lame
           and
           maimed
           without
           the
           〈◊〉
           ;
           and
           in
           many
           oft
           they
           doe
           not
           meet
           .
           But
           an
           happy
           coniunction
           of
           them
           both
           was
           there
           in
           this
           our
           Brother
           .
           For
           the
           proofe
           whereof
           I
           may
           well
           referre
           my selfe
           to
           the
           iudgement
           ,
           both
           of
           those
           that
           so
           frequently
           desired
           to
           make
           vse
           of
           him
           ,
           for
           the
           ouersight
           of
           their
           
             last
             wils
          
           ,
           and
           for
           his
           assistance
           by
           way
           of
           direction
           ,
           in
           the
           disposing
           of
           their
           estates
           :
           (
           and
           we
           know
           all
           ,
           how
           cautious
           men
           are
           wont
           to
           be
           in
           that
           kinde
           :
           )
           As
           also
           of
           those
           
             reuerend
             Brethren
          
           ,
           of
           the
           Ministerie
           as
           well
           as
           other
           ,
           who
           ,
           either
           
           by
           letters
           or
           otherwise
           ,
           out
           of
           
             all
             parts
          
           of
           this
           
           Realme
           (
           I
           speake
           what
           I
           know
           )
           did
           vsually
           seeke
           to
           him
           ,
           as
           to
           one
           more
           then
           ordinarily
           able
           to
           giue
           them
           satisfaction
           ,
           for
           the
           resolution
           of
           their
           doubts
           .
        
         
           These
           two
           then
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           )
           make
           
             a
             compleat
             man
          
           indeed
           .
           But
           there
           is
           somewhat
           more
           required
           to
           make
           
             a
             compleat
             Minister
          
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           i
           that
           he
           can
           k
           
             speak
             his
             mind
             fitly
          
           ,
           (
           for
           what
           vse
           of
           l
           
             a
             mute
             Messenger
             ?
          
           )
           and
           that
           he
           m
           
             dare
             doe
             it
             freely
          
           .
           (
           For
           n
           of
           whom
           is
           courage
           and
           freedome
           of
           speech
           required
           more
           then
           of
           
             Gods
             Messengers
             ?
          
           )
           Nor
           was
           this
           our
           worthy
           Brother
           defect
           〈…〉
           e
           in
           either
           .
        
         
           For
           ,
           as
           for
           the
           former
           ,
           how
           well
           able
           he
           was
           ,
           not
           to
           expresse
           only
           ,
           but
           to
           
             v
             〈…〉
             sse
          
           to
           ,
           nor
           to
           confirme
           alone
           ,
           but
           to
           commend
           also
           ,
           that
           that
           he
           deliuered
           ,
           with
           
             cleere
             method
             ,
             sound
             proopes
             ,
             〈…〉
             je
             words
             ,
             fit
             phrase
             ,
             pregnant
             similitudes
             ,
             plentifull
             illustrations
             ,
             pithy
             perswasions
             ,
             sweet
             insinuations
             ,
             powerfull
             enforcements
             ,
             allegations
             of
             antiquitie
             ,
          
           and
           
             variety
             of
             good
             literature
          
           ;
           that
           both
           the
           learnedst
           might
           
             receiue
             satisfaction
          
           from
           him
           ,
           and
           the
           very
           meanest
           and
           dullest
           also
           might
           
             reape
             benefit
          
           by
           him
           :
           and
           so
           as
           might
           well
           o
           leaue
           an
           impression
           in
           the
           hearts
           and
           mindes
           of
           his
           hearers
           ;
           they
           cannot
           bee
           ignorant
           ,
           
           that
           for
           any
           space
           of
           time
           heard
           him
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ,
           in
           this
           kinde
           he
           was
           such
           an
           one
           *
           as
           many
           stroue
           to
           
             imitate
             ,
             not
          
           many
           of
           them
           matched
           .
        
         
           Againe
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           in
           vaine
           to
           be
           able
           to
           speake
           to
           good
           purpose
           ,
           if
           a
           man
           
             dare
             not
          
           vse
           his
           tongue
           ;
           if
           ,
           as
           he
           said
           sometime
           of
           the
           Eretrians
           ,
           he
           be
           p
           like
           the
           Sword-fish
           ,
           that
           q
           
             hath
             a
             sword
          
           ,
           but
           hath
           
             no
             heart
          
           ;
           or
           like
           some
           
             cowardly
             companion
          
           ,
           that
           
             carrieth
             a
             weapon
          
           about
           him
           for
           a
           shew
           ,
           but
           
             dare
             not
             draw
             it
          
           ,
           or
           make
           vse
           of
           it
           ,
           though
           iust
           occasion
           thereof
           bee
           offered
           :
           For
           his
           freedome
           of
           speech
           therefore
           in
           reprouing
           of
           sinne
           ,
           and
           that
           euen
           to
           the
           faces
           of
           the
           
             gr
             〈…〉
             est
          
           ,
           both
           in
           publike
           and
           priuate
           ,
           when
           occ
           〈…〉
           on
           required
           it
           ,
           I
           doubt
           not
           but
           there
           are
           many
           here
           that
           are
           well
           able
           to
           testifie
           ,
           and
           some
           accidents
           made
           it
           to
           bee
           more
           publikely
           knowne
           ,
           then
           his
           desire
           was
           that
           it
           should
           haue
           beene
           .
        
         
           Much
           hath
           beene
           spoken
           ,
           and
           much
           more
           then
           I
           entended
           ;
           and
           more
           time
           taken
           vp
           then
           I
           made
           account
           of
           .
           And
           yet
           much
           more
           might
           be
           added
           ,
           then
           hath
           beene
           spoken
           ,
           if
           time
           and
           strength
           would
           permit
           .
           Many
           things
           I
           haue
           touched
           ,
           and
           rather
           
             pointed
             at
          
           then
           
             insisted
             on
          
           .
           And
           yet
           many
           things
           (
           I
           know
           )
           many
           among
           you
           will
           misse
           ,
           that
           might
           as
           iustly
           haue
           beene
           spoken
           of
           ,
           and
           that
           (
           it
           may
           bee
           )
           some
           of
           you
           will
           deeme
           should
           not
           haue
           beene
           omitted
           .
           One
           ,
           his
           Zealous
           and
           
             earnest
             pursuit
          
           of
           reformation
           of
           some
           prophanations
           of
           the
           Sabbath
           ;
           wherein
           he
           preuailed
           also
           for
           alteration
           of
           some
           things
           in
           that
           kinde
           offensiue
           ,
           as
           well
           r
           with
           the
           
             maine
             body
          
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           as
           s
           with
           some
           particular
           societies
           :
           
           An
           other
           his
           
             discreet
             carriage
          
           in
           the
           catechizing
           
           of
           the
           younger
           sort
           ;
           the
           males
           apart
           one
           day
           ,
           and
           the
           females
           another
           ;
           the
           riper
           and
           forwarder
           first
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           the
           ruder
           and
           rawer
           ,
           and
           the
           ruder
           and
           
             rawer
             apart
          
           by
           themselues
           after
           the
           departure
           of
           the
           former
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           both
           reape
           what
           fruit
           might
           bee
           by
           hearing
           them
           ,
           and
           yet
           
             receiue
             no
             discouragement
          
           by
           
             being
             heard
          
           of
           them
           :
           A
           third
           his
           
             pious
             care
          
           and
           diligence
           in
           the
           
             religious
             instruction
          
           and
           education
           of
           those
           that
           were
           vnder
           his
           
             priuate
             charge
             ,
             children
          
           and
           others
           :
           Some
           one
           thing
           ,
           some
           another
           .
           And
           I
           co
           〈…〉
           sse
           ,
           with
           Nazianzene
           in
           somewhat
           the
           like
           case
           ,
           〈…〉
           at
           it
           is
           herein
           with
           me
           ,
           t
           as
           with
           one
           in
           a
           field
           or
           a
           〈◊〉
           ,
           replenisht
           with
           
             faire
             flowers
          
           of
           
             all
             sorts
          
           ,
           who
           w
           〈…〉
           casteth
           his
           eye
           on
           one
           ,
           another
           offereth
           it selfe
           to
           him
           ,
           and
           while
           he
           is
           catching
           at
           that
           ,
           another
           commeth
           in
           his
           way
           ,
           and
           while
           that
           pleaseth
           his
           eye
           ,
           another
           withdraweth
           it
           to
           it selfe
           :
           And
           
           as
           the
           rings
           or
           circles
           that
           rise
           on
           the
           surface
           of
           the
           water
           ,
           when
           a
           stone
           is
           cast
           into
           a
           standing
           poole
           ,
           they
           come
           so
           thick
           one
           vpon
           the
           neck
           of
           another
           ,
           that
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           stroue
           for
           place
           ,
           they
           iustle
           out
           either
           other
           :
           so
           such
           variety
           of
           passages
           presenteth
           it selfe
           to
           me
           ,
           that
           while
           I
           looke
           after
           one
           ,
           I
           lose
           and
           let
           slip
           another
           ,
           and
           when
           I
           would
           fetch
           that
           
           vp
           againe
           ,
           another
           choppeth
           in
           ,
           as
           contending
           for
           roome
           with
           it
           :
           And
           if
           I
           should
           pursue
           and
           
             insist
             vpon
          
           euery
           particular
           ,
           that
           either
           others
           might
           expect
           ,
           or
           that
           might
           iustly
           challenge
           a
           place
           here
           time
           and
           speech
           would
           faile
           mee
           before
           matter
           to
           speake
           of
           .
        
         
           To
           draw
           toward
           an
           end
           therefore
           together
           with
           his
           end
           ;
           the
           end
           of
           his
           labours
           ,
           but
           the
           beginning
           of
           his
           resi
           ,
           the
           end
           of
           his
           worke
           ,
           but
           the
           receipt
           of
           his
           reward
           :
           In
           these
           and
           the
           like
           imploiments
           publike
           and
           priuate
           ,
           hee
           spent
           his
           time
           ,
           he
           spent
           his
           strength
           ,
           x
           like
           a
           torch
           or
           
             taper
             ,
             wasting
          
           and
           
             consuming
             himself
          
           ,
           for
           the
           behoofe
           and
           benefit
           of
           others
           ,
           y
           ha
           〈…〉
           g
           his
           
             worke
             with
             God
          
           then
           ,
           and
           his
           reward
           for
           it
           
             from
             God
          
           now
           .
           And
           for
           these
           emploiments
           principally
           it
           was
           that
           he
           desired
           recouery
           of
           health
           and
           strength
           ;
           vnto
           the
           performance
           whereof
           also
           (
           though
           therein
           iniurious
           to
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           contrary
           to
           his
           owne
           desires
           )
           he
           oft
           strained
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           his
           infirmitie
           and
           weaknesse
           ,
           not
           to
           the
           vncertaine
           hazard
           onely
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           euident
           impeachment
           and
           impairing
           of
           either
           .
           z
           
             What
             is
             the
             Signe
          
           ,
           said
           Ezekias
           ,
           when
           he
           was
           promised
           recouery
           ,
           
             that
             I
             shall
             goe
             vp
             to
             the
             house
             of
             the
             Lord
             ?
          
           as
           desiring
           continuance
           of
           life
           and
           recouery
           of
           health
           for
           no
           one
           end
           more
           then
           that
           .
           And
           therfore
           also
           was
           this
           our
           Brother
           so
           desirous
           of
           recouery
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           repaire
           to
           
             Gods
             house
          
           againe
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           returne
           to
           
             Gods
             worke
          
           againe
           .
           To
           which
           purpose
           the
           very
           last
           
             Lords
             day
          
           before
           his
           decease
           ,
           hauing
           after
           many
           relapses
           recouered
           a
           little
           strength
           ,
           he
           made
           shift
           to
           get
           out
           to
           a
           neighbour
           
           Congregation
           ,
           there
           to
           ioine
           with
           
             Gods
             people
          
           in
           
             publike
             performance
          
           of
           such
           
             solemne
             seruice
             of
             God
          
           as
           that
           day
           is
           vsually
           spent
           and
           emploied
           in
           .
           And
           hauing
           held
           out
           to
           the
           end
           with
           them
           in
           
             both
             parts
          
           of
           the
           day
           ,
           he
           reioiced
           much
           therein
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           able
           so
           to
           doe
           ;
           the
           rather
           because
           thereby
           he
           conceiued
           some
           good
           hope
           ,
           that
           hee
           should
           be
           strong
           enough
           ere
           long
           ,
           to
           returne
           to
           his
           wonted
           worke
           and
           employment
           againe
           .
           But
           the
           Lord
           saw
           it
           better
           (
           for
           *
           his
           will
           appeareth
           by
           his
           worke
           )
           to
           put
           an
           end
           to
           his
           
             incessant
             labours
          
           here
           ,
           and
           to
           translate
           him
           to
           the
           place
           of
           his
           
             endlesse
             rest
          
           else
           where
           .
           The
           gaine
           is
           his
           ;
           the
           losse
           ours
           ,
           min●●wne
           (
           among
           others
           )
           not
           the
           least
           .
           The
           
             Lord
             sanctifie
          
           it
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           and
           to
           those
           whom
           any
           way
           it
           concernet
           〈…〉
           ;
           and
           vouchsafe
           in
           mercy
           to
           repaire
           it
           ,
           by
           raising
           vp
           many
           alike
           qualified
           and
           endowed
           in
           his
           roome
           .
           With
           whom
           now
           leaue
           we
           him
           ,
           and
           returning
           home
           to
           our selues
           ,
           afford
           we
           a
           reuerent
           and
           
             religious
             care
          
           to
           those
           instructions
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           fitting
           and
           preparing
           of
           vs
           vnto
           the
           way
           that
           he
           is
           gone
           before
           vs
           ,
           shall
           out
           of
           
             Gods
             Word
          
           be
           deliuered
           vnto
           vs.
           
        
      
       
         
         
           ABRAHAMS
           DECEASE
           .
        
         
           
             GEN.
             25.
             8.
             
          
           
             And
             Abraham
             gaue
             vp
             the
             ghost
             ,
             and
             died
             ,
             in
             ●good
             old
             age
             ,
             an
             old
             man
             ,
             and
             full
             of
             yeeres
             ;
             and
             he
             was
             gathered
             to
             his
             people
             .
          
        
         
           BEfore
           was
           a
           long
           discourse
           
           of
           
             Abrahams
             life
          
           :
           here
           is
           a
           report
           in
           few
           words
           of
           his
           death
           .
        
         
           Wherein
           (
           to
           come
           to
           
           them
           directly
           without
           further
           preface
           ,
           because
           much
           time
           is
           already
           spent
           )
           wee
           may
           consider
           these
           particulars
           :
        
         
           1
           Who
           died
           ;
        
         
           2
           How
           he
           died
           ;
        
         
           3
           When
           he
           died
           ;
           and
        
         
           4
           Whither
           he
           went
           when
           he
           died
           .
        
         
         
           
             First
             ,
             who
             died
          
           ;
           Abraham
           .
           
        
         
           
             Whence
             we
             may
             obserue
             ,
             that
          
        
         
           No
           state
           or
           condition
           here
           freeth
           men
           from
           death
           .
        
         
           For
           who
           might
           sooner
           or
           better
           haue
           expected
           to
           haue
           beene
           freed
           from
           it
           then
           
             Abraham
             ?
             Abraham
          
           (
           I
           say
           )
           a
           
             a
             Prophet
             of
             God
          
           ;
           b
           
             a
             Prince
             of
             God
          
           ;
           c
           a
           speciall
           
             friend
             of
             God
          
           ;
           d
           
             the
             Father
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           And
           yet
           of
           this
           
             Abraham
             ,
             a
             Prince
             ,
             a
             Prophet
             ,
             Gods
             friend
             ,
             his
             fauourite
             ,
             the
             father
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
          
           is
           it
           here
           said
           ,
           that
           
             he
             died
          
           ;
           and
           by
           the
           Iewes
           to
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           e
           
             Abraham
             is
             dead
          
           .
           So
           f
           
             Lazarus
             Christs
             friend
          
           ;
           and
           yet
           ,
           g
           
             This
             our
             Friend
          
           (
           saith
           
             Christ
             )
             sleepeth
          
           ;
           that
           is
           (
           as
           afterward
           he
           there
           e
           〈…〉
           eth
           himselfe
           )
           h
           
             hee
             is
             dead
          
           .
           The
           i
           Apostles
           likew
           〈…〉
           
             Christs
             friends
          
           ;
           and
           yet
           they
           are
           k
           
             all
             dead
          
           :
           (
           For
           it
           was
           no
           true
           l
           Word
           that
           
             went
             among
             the
             Disciples
          
           concerning
           Iohn
           ,
           from
           the
           words
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           either
           n
           mistaken
           or
           misinterpreted
           ,
           that
           
             that
             Disciple
             should
             not
             die
             .
             )
             Dauid
          
           o
           
             a
             man
             after
             Gods
             owne
          
           m
           heart
           :
           and
           yet
           p
           
             he
             goeth
             the
             way
             of
             :
             all
             flesh
             .
          
           q
           
             Your
             Fathers
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Prophet
           
             Zachary
             )
             where
             are
             they
             ?
             or
             doe
             the
             Prophets
             liue
             for
             euer
             ?
          
           And
           the
           Iewes
           answer
           him
           in
           the
           negatiue
           ,
           No
           ;
           r
           
             the
             Prophets
             are
             dead
          
           .
           In
           a
           word
           ;
           as
           the
           Psalmist
           saith
           ,
           that
           s
           
             wise
             men
             die
             as
             well
             as
             fooles
             :
          
           so
           t
           good
           men
           die
           as
           well
           as
           bad
           :
           yea
           ,
           the
           good
           goe
           oft
           before
           the
           bad
           .
           x
           
             The
             righteous
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             are
             taken
             away
             from
             the
             euill
             to
             come
             .
          
           And
           of
           Ieroboams
           young
           Sonne
           it
           is
           said
           ;
           
           
           y
           
             He
             shall
             die
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             some
             goodnesse
             in
             him
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           the
           reason
           why
           the
           
             godly
             die
          
           as
           well
           as
           the
           wicked
           ,
           is
           ,
        
         
           First
           ,
           if
           we
           regard
           
             naturall
             causes
          
           ,
           
        
         
           1.
           
           Because
           they
           are
           made
           of
           the
           same
           mould
           and
           mettall
           that
           others
           are
           :
           a
           
             We
             haue
             this
             treasure
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Apostle
           )
           in
           b
           
             earthen
             vessels
          
           :
           they
           are
           but
           c
           
             earthen
             p●ts
          
           as
           well
           as
           d
           others
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           Because
           they
           are
           subiect
           to
           the
           same
           casualties
           that
           others
           are
           .
           For
           ,
           e
           
             All
             things
             come
             alike
             to
             all
             :
             The
             same
          
           f
           
             chance
             betideth
             the
             good
             and
             the
             bad
             ;
             the
             cleane
             and
             the
             vncleane
          
           ;
           g
           
             the
             sacrificer
             and
             him
             that
             sacrificeth
             not
          
           ;
           h
           
             the
             swearer
             ,
             and
             him
             that
          
           i
           
             feareth
             to
             sweare
             ,
             that
             maketh
             conscience
             of
             an
             oath
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           if
           we
           regard
           
             spirituall
             respects
          
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           The
           
             godly
             die
          
           also
           that
           they
           may
           rest
           from
           their
           labours
           :
           For
           ,
           k
           
             They
             rest
             from
             their
             labours
             that
             are
             deceased
             in
             Christ.
             
          
        
         
           2.
           
           They
           die
           that
           they
           may
           receiue
           their
           reward
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           l
           
             the
             Crowne
             of
             righteousnesse
          
           ;
           which
           they
           must
           m
           not
           expect
           ,
           till
           they
           haue
           n
           
             finished
             their
             race
          
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           They
           die
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           be
           rid
           of
           sinne
           :
           o
           
             they
             die
             for
             sinne
          
           ,
           saith
           the
           Apostle
           :
           yet
           not
           to
           pay
           for
           it
           ,
           as
           the
           wicked
           doe
           ,
           but
           to
           be
           p
           
             freed
             from
          
           it
           :
           For
           ,
           q
           
             He
             that
             is
             dead
             ,
             is
             freed
             from
             sinne
             .
          
        
         
           4.
           
           They
           die
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           be
           r
           freed
           from
           death
           it selfe
           :
           s
           
             that
             mortalitie
          
           (
           saith
           the
           same
           Apostle
           )
           
             may
             be
             swallowed
             vp
             of
             life
             .
          
        
         
         
           5.
           
           They
           die
           ,
           that
           they
           mayt
           
             goe
             to
             God
          
           :
           For
           ,
           u
           
             While
             we
             bide
             here
             in
             the
             body
             ,
             wee
             are
             absent
             from
          
           
           
             the
             Lord
          
           :
           and
           x
           
             We
             desire
             therefore
             to
             remoue
             hence
             ,
             that
             we
             may
             goe
             home
             to
             him
             .
          
        
         
           6.
           
           They
           die
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           
             be
             with
             Christ
          
           :
           y
           
             I
             desire
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           z
           
             to
             loose
          
           ,
           or
           
             to
             be
             loosed
             ,
             and
             to
             bee
             with
             Christ.
             
          
        
         
           But
           against
           the
           truth
           of
           this
           point
           ,
           may
           some
           obiection
           be
           made
           .
        
         
           For
           first
           ,
           if
           
             no
             state
          
           or
           
             condition
             free
          
           men
           
             from
             death
          
           ,
           how
           (
           may
           some
           say
           )
           it
           is
           said
           of
           Enoch
           ,
           that
           a
           
             he
             neuer
             saw
             death
          
           ;
           and
           of
           Elias
           ,
           that
           b
           
             he
             was
             taken
          
           
           
             vp
             aliue
             into
             heauen
          
           ?
        
         
           To
           this
           I
           answer
           ,
           that
           c
           
             singular
             and
             extraordinary
             priuiledges
             neither
             make
             a
             rule
             ,
             nor
             marre
             a
             rule
             .
          
           It
           followeth
           not
           ,
           because
           some
           one
           or
           two
           of
           this
           or
           that
           estate
           or
           condition
           haue
           by
           
             speciall
             fauour
          
           beene
           some
           time
           exempted
           from
           this
           
             generall
             sentence
          
           ,
           that
           therefore
           the
           estate
           or
           condition
           it selfe
           exempteth
           any
           ,
           or
           that
           all
           of
           the
           same
           estate
           are
           exempt
           and
           freed
           therefore
           therefrom
           .
           e
           
             Ezekias
             walketh
             with
             God
          
           as
           well
           as
           f
           Enoch
           ,
           and
           yet
           g
           he
           died
           ,
           when
           his
           lease
           of
           h
           
             fifteene
             yeeres
          
           expired
           .
           Eliseus
           was
           i
           
             a
             Prophet
             of
             God
          
           as
           well
           as
           Elias
           ;
           and
           k
           
             the
             Spirit
             of
             Elias
          
           (
           it
           is
           said
           )
           
             rested
             vpon
             Eliseus
          
           :
           and
           yet
           l
           he
           died
           ,
           and
           was
           buried
           ;
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           m
           miracle
           ,
           that
           God
           wrought
           by
           his
           corps
           sometime
           after
           his
           decease
           .
           These
           were
           
             personall
             priuiledges
          
           :
           and
           n
           
             personall
             prerogatiues
          
           passe
           no
           further
           than
           the
           persons
           
           
           of
           those
           ,
           whom
           they
           are
           conferred
           on
           .
        
         
           But
           secondly
           ,
           if
           euen
           o
           the
           
             faithfull
             die
          
           also
           ,
           (
           for
           
           how
           should
           the
           faithfull
           looke
           to
           escape
           death
           ,
           when
           p
           
             the
             Father
             of
             the
             faithfull
          
           ,
           as
           wee
           see
           here
           ,
           himselfe
           
             dieth
             ?
          
           )
           how
           (
           may
           some
           say
           )
           are
           the
           words
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           made
           good
           where
           he
           saith
           ;
           q
           
             If
             any
             man
             keepe
             my
             sayings
             ,
             he
             shall
             neuer
          
           r
           
             see
             death
          
           ;
           And
           ,
           s
           
             He
             that
             liueth
             and
             beleeueth
             in
             me
             ,
             shall
          
           t
           
             neuer
             die
          
           ?
        
         
           To
           this
           I
           answer
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           as
           a
           
             a
             twofold
             life
          
           ,
           so
           b
           
             a
             twofold
             death
          
           :
           A
           twofold
           life
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           c
           
             a
             naturall
             life
          
           issuing
           from
           the
           coniunction
           of
           the
           soule
           to
           the
           body
           ;
           and
           d
           
             a
             spirituall
             life
          
           arising
           from
           the
           coniunction
           of
           God
           to
           the
           soule
           .
           And
           a
           twofold
           death
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           e
           
             a
             naturall
             death
          
           arising
           from
           the
           disiunction
           of
           the
           soule
           from
           the
           body
           ;
           and
           f
           
             a
             spirituall
             death
          
           arising
           from
           the
           disiunction
           of
           God
           from
           the
           soule
           .
           For
           looke
           g
           what
           the
           soule
           is
           to
           the
           body
           ,
           the
           same
           is
           God
           to
           the
           soule
           .
           h
           As
           the
           soule
           is
           the
           life
           of
           the
           body
           ,
           so
           is
           God
           the
           life
           of
           the
           soule
           .
           And
           i
           as
           the
           
             naturall
             death
          
           ensueth
           ,
           when
           the
           
             soule
             departeth
          
           from
           the
           body
           ;
           so
           the
           
             spirituall
             death
          
           followeth
           ,
           when
           
             God
             with-draweth
          
           himselfe
           from
           the
           soule
           .
           The
           faithfull
           then
           may
           dye
           the
           
             naturall
             death
          
           :
           but
           they
           neuer
           dye
           the
           
             spirituall
             death
          
           .
           u
           Death
           may
           seuer
           their
           soules
           from
           their
           bodies
           :
           but
           x
           death
           
           cannot
           cut
           off
           either
           soule
           or
           body
           with
           them
           from
           Christ.
           The
           Faithfull
           may
           die
           ;
           and
           yet
           our
           Sauiours
           words
           true
           .
           For
           a
           they
           
             die
             not
          
           ,
           euen
           when
           they
           die
           .
           b
           Wicked
           men
           (
           saith
           Chrysostome
           )
           are
           c
           dead
           euen
           while
           they
           
             liue
             :
             good
          
           and
           godly
           men
           d
           liue
           euen
           when
           they
           be
           dead
           .
           The
           life
           of
           the
           one
           is
           nothing
           but
           e
           
             a
             passage
             to
             death
          
           :
           the
           death
           of
           the
           other
           is
           nothing
           but
           f
           
             an
             entrance
             into
             life
          
           .
           For
           it
           is
           g
           
             no
             life
          
           but
           death
           ,
           that
           
             seuereth
             a
             man
             from
             Christ
          
           while
           he
           liueth
           :
           It
           is
           h
           
             no
             death
          
           but
           life
           ,
           that
           
             bringeth
             a
             man
             home
             to
             Christ
          
           when
           he
           dieth
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           much
           briefly
           for
           answer
           to
           these
           two
           Obiections
           .
        
         
           Now
           for
           the
           vse
           of
           the
           Point
           .
        
         
           First
           ,
           it
           may
           serue
           to
           hearten
           and
           encourage
           vs
           against
           the
           feare
           and
           dread
           of
           death
           .
           For
           doe
           all
           ,
           
           euen
           the
           godly
           and
           
             faithfull
             die
          
           ?
           Why
           should
           wee
           be
           loath
           to
           come
           to
           that
           ,
           that
           so
           many
           Saints
           of
           God
           haue
           come
           to
           before
           ?
           As
           Phocion
           said
           to
           one
           that
           was
           to
           die
           with
           him
           ;
           i
           
             Art
             thou
             not
             glad
             to
             fare
             as
             Phocion
             doth
             ?
          
           So
           ,
           why
           should
           any
           be
           loath
           to
           doe
           as
           Abraham
           doth
           ?
           Or
           why
           should
           we
           be
           afraid
           to
           goe
           that
           way
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           holy
           men
           of
           God
           haue
           gone
           before
           vs
           ?
           It
           is
           true
           indeed
           ,
           there
           might
           be
           some
           colourable
           cause
           of
           feare
           ,
           if
           wee
           were
           to
           goe
           some
           k
           vncouth
           and
           
             vntrod
             way
          
           ,
           such
           as
           none
           euer
           went
           before
           vs
           ;
           as
           l
           Abel
           did
           when
           he
           died
           .
           Or
           if
           none
           but
           the
           wicked
           had
           gone
           this
           way
           before
           vs
           ,
           
           we
           might
           iustly
           feare
           ,
           that
           it
           were
           indeed
           the
           
             high
             way
          
           to
           hell
           .
           But
           now
           when
           the
           
             blessed
             Saints
          
           and
           the
           
             best
             beloued
          
           of
           God
           haue
           ,
           either
           all
           or
           the
           most
           of
           them
           at
           least
           ,
           gone
           this
           way
           before
           vs
           ;
           yea
           when
           he
           was
           no
           wicked
           but
           m
           a
           iust
           man
           ,
           that
           n
           went
           first
           of
           all
           this
           way
           :
           we
           may
           well
           and
           boldly
           follow
           him
           and
           them
           in
           it
           without
           feare
           ,
           as
           being
           o
           the
           
             high
             way
          
           to
           Heauen
           too
           ;
           nor
           neede
           we
           dread
           or
           suspect
           any
           p
           euill
           in
           that
           ,
           that
           q
           God
           ,
           who
           loued
           them
           so
           deerely
           ,
           would
           neuer
           haue
           suffered
           to
           befall
           them
           ,
           if
           it
           should
           haue
           beene
           any
           way
           preiudiciall
           vnto
           them
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           doe
           euen
           such
           also
           die
           .
           This
           should
           teach
           vs
           r
           not
           to
           mourne
           or
           bee
           grieued
           for
           the
           
             faithfull
             deceased
          
           ,
           as
           if
           any
           euill
           had
           befallen
           them
           .
           For
           if
           they
           s
           
             died
             in
             the
             Lord
          
           ,
           if
           they
           t
           
             deceased
             in
             the
             faith
          
           ;
           they
           are
           but
           gone
           the
           same
           way
           that
           
             Gods
             best
          
           
           beloued
           went
           before
           them
           that
           liued
           in
           former
           times
           .
           They
           are
           rather
           u
           departed
           ,
           than
           deceased
           ;
           x
           
             sent
             before
          
           vs
           ,
           whither
           y
           we
           must
           follow
           ,
           z
           leaft
           onely
           ,
           not
           lost
           .
           Their
           death
           is
           rather
           a
           a
           departing
           ,
           or
           b
           a
           
             going
             out
             of
             this
             world
          
           ,
           or
           c
           
             a
             passage
             to
             heauen
          
           ,
           
           or
           d
           
             a
             returne
             to
             God
          
           ,
           then
           a
           e
           deceasing
           ,
           or
           f
           surceasing
           ,
           or
           g
           intermission
           ,
           or
           h
           intercision
           ,
           yea
           ,
           or
           i
           diminution
           ,
           either
           of
           l●fe
           ,
           or
           of
           their
           good
           or
           happy
           estate
           .
           There
           is
           no
           cause
           therefore
           to
           mourne
           for
           those
           that
           
             die
             in
             Christ
          
           ;
           there
           is
           cause
           rather
           to
           mourne
           for
           those
           that
           
             liue
             out
             of
             Christ.
          
           For
           the
           one
           liueth
           still
           though
           he
           die
           :
           the
           other
           is
           dead
           ,
           though
           he
           yet
           liue
           ,
           and
           shall
           one
           day
           
             die
             eternally
          
           ,
           if
           he
           continue
           as
           he
           now
           is
           .
           k
           Doest
           thou
           mourne
           (
           saith
           Augustine
           )
           ouer
           the
           body
           that
           the
           soule
           hath
           
             leaft
             :
             mourne
          
           rather
           ouer
           the
           soule
           that
           God
           hath
           forsaken
           ;
           as
           l
           Samuel
           did
           for
           Saul
           ;
           and
           as
           m
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           he
           should
           doe
           for
           such
           as
           had
           
             liued
             in
             lewd
             and
             loose
             courses
             ,
          
           and
           
             not
             repented
          
           yet
           of
           them
           .
           n
           Such
           there
           is
           cause
           therefore
           indeede
           to
           mourne
           for
           :
           But
           no
           cause
           in
           the
           world
           to
           mourne
           for
           those
           that
           are
           in
           no
           worse
           case
           ,
           than
           Abraham
           and
           Isaak
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           faithfull
           are
           ,
           that
           liued
           in
           former
           times
           ,
           
           or
           than
           others
           of
           the
           same
           ranke
           shall
           be
           hereafter
           to
           the
           worlds
           ends
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           are
           o
           all
           of
           
             all
             sorts
             subiect
             to
             death
          
           ,
           as
           well
           good
           as
           bad
           ,
           Prophets
           as
           priuate
           men
           ,
           &
           c
           ?
           This
           then
           should
           admonish
           vs
           to
           make
           the
           best
           vse
           we
           can
           of
           our
           
             religious
             friends
             ,
             neighbours
             ,
             acquaintance
             ,
             husbands
             ,
          
           parents
           ,
           pastors
           especially
           ,
           while
           they
           are
           with
           vs
           ,
           (
           p
           Walke
           ,
           yea
           and
           q
           worke
           too
           ,
           
             by
             the
             light
             ,
             while
             you
             haue
             it
             with
             you
             ,
          
           saith
           our
           
           Sauiour
           )
           since
           that
           r
           we
           know
           not
           how
           soone
           they
           may
           be
           taken
           away
           from
           vs.
           It
           is
           that
           wherein
           most
           men
           are
           generally
           faulty
           ,
           that
           as
           he
           saith
           of
           rarities
           and
           
             strange
             sights
          
           ,
           s
           when
           they
           are
           neere
           at
           hand
           with
           vs
           ,
           we
           
             regard
             not
          
           so
           much
           to
           see
           them
           ,
           as
           we
           would
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           further
           off
           ,
           and
           wee
           should
           come
           occasionally
           where
           they
           were
           ,
           or
           as
           strangers
           are
           wont
           to
           be
           ,
           that
           come
           out
           of
           other
           parts
           ,
           whither
           they
           are
           after
           a
           while
           to
           returne
           againe
           ;
           because
           hauing
           them
           
             at
             hand
          
           ,
           we
           thinke
           we
           may
           see
           them
           when
           wee
           will
           ,
           whereas
           the
           strangers
           ,
           vnlesse
           hee
           see
           them
           now
           ,
           while
           hee
           is
           here
           ,
           thinketh
           hee
           shall
           neuer
           haue
           the
           like
           opportunity
           againe
           :
           So
           we
           t
           neglect
           oft
           to
           make
           that
           good
           vse
           that
           wee
           might
           ,
           of
           the
           meanes
           and
           the
           ministery
           that
           God
           hath
           setled
           among
           vs
           ,
           and
           of
           our
           
             religious
             friends
          
           that
           he
           hath
           setled
           vs
           with
           ,
           in
           hope
           that
           wee
           may
           long
           enioy
           them
           ,
           and
           hauing
           them
           
             at
             hand
          
           with
           vs
           ,
           we
           may
           make
           vse
           of
           them
           when
           wee
           will.
           By
           meanes
           whereof
           it
           commeth
           many
           times
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           meere
           strangers
           ,
           that
           visit
           them
           but
           
             by
             starts
          
           ,
           profit
           more
           by
           them
           ,
           than
           the
           most
           of
           those
           doe
           ,
           that
           constantly
           liue
           and
           abide
           with
           them
           ,
           and
           that
           *
           when
           it
           is
           too
           late
           now
           ,
           we
           come
           to
           see
           and
           consider
           to
           our
           griefe
           ,
           what
           opportunitie
           we
           haue
           ouerslipped
           of
           our
           owne
           good
           .
           It
           is
           with
           vs
           in
           these
           c●ses
           as
           it
           is
           with
           vs
           for
           our
           bookes
           .
           A
           booke
           of
           good
           vse
           borrowed
           ,
           which
           we
           know
           not
           how
           soone
           the
           owner
           of
           it
           may
           call
           for
           ,
           wee
           are
           carefull
           to
           make
           
             present
             vse
          
           of
           ,
           whereas
           it
           might
           chance
           to
           haue
           
             lien
             long
          
           by
           vs
           ,
           ere
           we
           looked
           on
           it
           ,
           if
           it
           had
           beene
           
           
             our
             owne
          
           .
           Well
           it
           were
           therefore
           for
           vs
           ,
           if
           wee
           could
           seriously
           consider
           ,
           that
           u
           our
           
             religious
             friends
          
           and
           Pastors
           ,
           (
           as
           x
           all
           other
           
             things
             of
             this
             life
          
           ,
           yea
           ,
           and
           y
           life
           too
           it selfe
           )
           are
           not
           so
           much
           giuen
           vs
           of
           God
           ,
           as
           lent
           vs
           to
           vse
           ,
           and
           that
           z
           for
           no
           longer
           than
           he
           shall
           see
           good
           ;
           and
           therefore
           labour
           to
           make
           the
           
             best
             vse
          
           we
           can
           of
           them
           ,
           while
           we
           haue
           them
           ;
           as
           we
           would
           doe
           of
           some
           toole
           or
           vtensile
           ,
           that
           being
           lent
           vs
           ,
           we
           know
           not
           how
           long
           wee
           shall
           haue
           the
           vse
           of
           .
           
        
         
           And
           thus
           much
           for
           the
           first
           particular
           ,
           the
           Person
           that
           died
           ,
           Abraham
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           followeth
           ,
           and
           that
           is
           the
           
             manner
             how
          
           he
           died
           ,
           noted
           in
           that
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           a
           
             He
             breathed
             out
          
           ,
           or
           ,
           
             He
             gaue
             vp
             the
             Ghost
          
           .
        
         
           That
           which
           some
           expound
           of
           b
           
             a
             willing
             end
          
           ,
           of
           a
           willingnesse
           to
           depart
           :
           as
           it
           is
           said
           of
           our
           Sauiour
           ,
           that
           c
           
             hee
             bowed
             his
             head
             downe
          
           ,
           when
           
             all
             was
             finished
          
           ,
           and
           d
           
             gaue
             vp
             his
             Spirit
          
           .
           And
           true
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           as
           the
           Heathen
           man
           saith
           ,
           e
           it
           is
           
             the
             part
             of
             a
             wise
             man
             ,
          
           rather
           
             willingly
             to
             goe
             out
          
           ,
           than
           to
           bee
           
             thrust
             out
             against
             his
             will
          
           ,
           so
           it
           is
           the
           f
           vsuall
           practise
           of
           
             Gods
             children
          
           willingly
           to
           
             resigne
             and
             giue
             their
             soules
             vp
             to
             God
             ,
          
           when
           he
           pleaseth
           to
           call
           for
           them
           .
        
         
           Others
           vnderstand
           it
           g
           of
           
             a
             quiet
             end
          
           ,
           or
           an
           
             easie
             end
          
           ,
           of
           dying
           without
           difficultie
           :
           as
           it
           is
           said
           of
           
           Iacob
           ,
           that
           h
           when
           he
           had
           done
           
             blessing
             his
             sonnes
             ,
             he
             plucked
             vp
             his
             feet
             ,
             and
             so
             gaue
             vp
             the
             ghost
             .
          
           And
           it
           is
           true
           also
           that
           i
           old
           men
           vsually
           die
           with
           much
           ease
           ;
           k
           like
           
             an
             apple
          
           that
           being
           come
           to
           full
           maturi●y
           ,
           doeth
           without
           force
           or
           stresse
           vsed
           to
           it
           ,
           
             drop
             downe
          
           of
           it selfe
           ;
           or
           like
           
             a
             lampe
          
           ,
           that
           l
           of
           it selfe
           
             goeth
             out
          
           ,
           when
           the
           matter
           that
           fed
           it
           faileth
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           I
           finde
           the
           word
           vsed
           m
           generally
           and
           indefinitely
           ,
           as
           well
           of
           n
           young
           as
           of
           old
           ,
           as
           well
           of
           such
           as
           die
           o
           strong
           and
           violent
           ,
           as
           that
           die
           voluntary
           or
           
             easie
             deaths
          
           :
           I
           take
           it
           rather
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           in
           this
           phrase
           of
           speech
           an
           intimation
           of
           
             mans
             frailtie
          
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           frailtie
           of
           
             mans
             life
          
           .
           p
           
             Hee
             puffed
             out
          
           ,
           or
           ,
           q
           
             Hee
             breathed
             out
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           r
           
             His
             breath
             failed
          
           ,
           or
           ,
           s
           
             His
             breath
             went
             away
          
           ,
           and
           
             he
             died
          
           .
        
         
           So
           that
           the
           Point
           that
           hence
           I
           would
           obserue
           then
           is
           this
           ,
           that
        
         
           
             The
             life
             of
             Man
             is
             but
             a
             breath
             ,
             but
             a
             blast
             :
          
        
         
           And
           so
           consequently
           the
           frailty
           and
           the
           vanitie
           of
           
             mans
             life
          
           .
           That
           which
           may
           the
           better
           appeare
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           if
           we
           shall
           consider
           ,
        
         
           
             1
             What
             it
             is
             compared
             vnto
             ;
             and
          
           
             2
             What
             it
             may
             be
             
               taken
               away
            
             with
             .
          
        
         
           First
           (
           I
           say
           )
           what
           it
           is
           compared
           vnto
           .
           a
           
             What
             is
             man
          
           ?
           saith
           the
           Heathen
           man.
           Why
           ?
           hee
           is
           euen
           
             the
             dreame
             of
             a
             shadow
          
           .
           What
           hath
           lesse
           b
           truth
           in
           it
           than
           a
           dreame
           ?
           What
           lesse
           substance
           than
           a
           shadow
           ?
           
           What
           either
           vanisheth
           away
           more
           suddenly
           ,
           than
           the
           one
           ;
           or
           is
           dispelled
           sooner
           than
           the
           other
           ?
           Nor
           came
           another
           of
           them
           much
           short
           of
           him
           ,
           who
           compared
           
             mans
             state
          
           ,
           as
           the
           former
           did
           his
           life
           ,
           not
           to
           
             the
             dreame
             of
             a
             shadow
          
           ,
           but
           to
           the
           c
           
             shadow
             of
             a
             smoake
          
           .
           They
           seemed
           (
           it
           seemeth
           )
           to
           them
           to
           haue
           said
           little
           or
           nothing
           to
           speake
           of
           ,
           that
           compared
           it
           ,
           either
           to
           d
           
             a
             dreame
          
           ,
           or
           to
           e
           
             a
             smoake
          
           ,
           or
           to
           *
           
             a
             shadow
          
           alone
           ,
           when
           yet
           to
           minish
           the
           weight
           and
           adde
           to
           the
           vanitie
           of
           it
           ,
           ioyning
           two
           of
           them
           together
           ,
           they
           make
           it
           ,
           not
           
             a
             smoake
          
           onely
           ,
           but
           
             the
             shadow
             of
             a
             smoake
          
           ,
           that
           is
           farre
           lesse
           ;
           nor
           
             a
             dreame
          
           barely
           ,
           but
           †
           
             the
             dreame
          
           ,
           not
           of
           some
           substance
           ,
           which
           yet
           were
           a
           thing
           of
           nothing
           ,
           but
           of
           
             a
             shadow
          
           .
           And
           ,
           
             What
             is
             man
          
           saith
           one
           of
           the
           ancient
           Fathers
           .
           Why
           ?
           he
           is
           f
           Soule
           and
           Soile
           ;
           or
           Breath
           and
           Body
           :
           g
           
             apuffe
             of
             wind
          
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           h
           
             a
             pile
             of
             dust
          
           the
           other
           :
           no
           soliditie
           in
           either
           ,
           if
           you
           consider
           them
           apart
           ;
           and
           most
           vnlikely
           to
           impart
           any
           such
           thing
           either
           to
           other
           ,
           if
           you
           consider
           them
           in
           themselues
           .
           I
           might
           adde
           what
           they
           say
           ,
           that
           compare
           men
           to
           the
           i
           leaues
           of
           trees
           that
           
           soone
           shed
           ;
           to
           k
           bubbles
           on
           the
           water
           ,
           that
           fall
           as
           fast
           as
           they
           rise
           ;
           to
           *
           bladders
           puffed
           vp
           of
           wind
           ,
           that
           may
           be
           let
           out
           with
           the
           pricke
           of
           a
           pinne
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           .
        
         
           But
           because
           these
           may
           peraduenture
           seeme
           vnto
           some
           to
           haue
           spoken
           somewhat
           l
           hyperbolically
           or
           excessiuely
           in
           the
           point
           :
           let
           vs
           heare
           the
           
             Spirit
             of
             God
          
           ,
           that
           speaketh
           no
           otherwise
           of
           things
           than
           as
           they
           are
           indeede
           ,
           speake
           .
           If
           we
           demand
           then
           of
           the
           mouth
           of
           God
           himselfe
           ,
           
             What
             Man
             is
          
           ;
           he
           maketh
           vs
           answer
           euen
           in
           effect
           as
           they
           did
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           m
           
             Adam
             is
             as
             Abel
          
           ,
           or
           
             Abels
             Mate
          
           :
           (
           for
           to
           the
           Names
           of
           those
           two
           Patriarches
           there
           is
           an
           allusion
           in
           the
           
             Originall
             :
          
           )
           that
           is
           ,
           Man
           (
           as
           it
           is
           translated
           )
           
             is
             as
          
           n
           vanitie
           ,
           or
           ,
           o
           
             a
             thing
             of
             nought
             :
             his
             daies
             passe
             away
             like
          
           p
           
             a
             shadow
          
           .
           He
           is
           q
           
             as
             a
             dreame
             that
             vanisheth
             when
             one
             awaketh
             :
             as
          
           r
           
             a
             wind
          
           ,
           s
           
             that
             goeth
             away
             and
             commeth
             not
             againe
             .
          
           t
           
             His
             breath
             is
             in
             his
             nostrils
          
           ;
           ready
           euer
           and
           anon
           to
           puffe
           out
           :
           And
           u
           
             when
             that
             breath
          
           of
           his
           is
           
             once
             gone
          
           ,
           x
           
             hee
             returneth
             instantly
             to
             his
             dust
          
           ;
           to
           that
           dust
           ,
           y
           of
           which
           he
           was
           formed
           at
           first
           .
           His
           
             life
             is
          
           a
           
             as
             a
             cloud
          
           ,
           that
           is
           soone
           disperst
           with
           the
           wind
           ;
           or
           b
           
             as
             a
             vapour
             ,
             that
             appeareth
             for
             a
             while
             ,
             and
             then
             vanisheth
             away
             .
          
           In
           a
           word
           :
           c
           
             All
             Man
             is
             all
             Abel
          
           ;
           and
           that
           euen
           then
           ,
           when
           he
           is
           at
           the
           very
           best
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           
             euery
             Man
          
           ,
           d
           be
           he
           neuer
           so
           well
           vnderlaid
           ,
           neuer
           so
           surely
           and
           soundly
           setled
           ,
           he
           
             is
             nothing
             but
             vanitie
          
           ,
           that
           hath
           
             no
             soliditie
          
           at
           
           all
           in
           it
           ;
           or
           (
           as
           he
           saith
           elsewhere
           )
           but
           e
           alye
           ,
           that
           hath
           
             no
             truth
          
           at
           all
           in
           it
           ;
           or
           f
           
             as
             nothing
             〈◊〉
          
           yea
           ,
           g
           lighter
           
           (
           if
           ought
           may
           so
           be
           )
           
             than
             vanitie
          
           it selfe
           ;
           and
           (
           if
           more
           than
           so
           may
           be
           yet
           )
           euen
           h
           
             lesse
             than
             nothing
          
           .
           Which
           speeches
           (
           I
           suppose
           )
           come
           not
           an
           ace
           short
           of
           those
           other
           .
        
         
           Againe
           ,
           the
           frailtie
           and
           vanitie
           of
           
             mans
             life
          
           may
           appeare
           ,
           if
           we
           shall
           consider
           what
           it
           may
           be
           
             taken
             away
          
           with
           .
           And
           it
           is
           strange
           to
           think
           ,
           i
           how
           small
           a
           matter
           may
           put
           an
           end
           to
           
             mans
             life
          
           .
           When
           a
           
             great
             man
          
           sometime
           threatned
           
             a
             Philosopher
          
           with
           death
           ,
           k
           
             What
             is
             that
             more
          
           (
           quoth
           he
           )
           
             than
             à
             Spanish
             Flie
             may
             doe
             ?
          
           and
           he
           might
           well
           haue
           added
           ,
           
             not
             to
             me
             onely
             ,
             but
             to
             thy selfe
             .
          
           Yea
           ,
           to
           passe
           by
           that
           of
           Cleopatra
           ,
           who
           when
           to
           preuent
           publike
           disgrace
           ,
           she
           had
           made
           her selfe
           away
           with
           the
           helpe
           of
           
             an
             Aspe
          
           ,
           yet
           had
           nothing
           to
           be
           seene
           on
           her
           ,
           saue
           l
           
             two
             small
             pricks
          
           ,
           that
           could
           hardly
           be
           seene
           ,
           made
           with
           the
           
             wormes
             tooth
          
           on
           the
           one
           of
           her
           armes
           ;
           which
           yet
           were
           enough
           (
           it
           seemeth
           )
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           her
           ,
           and
           m
           might
           as
           well
           haue
           done
           of
           any
           other
           .
           To
           let
           that
           passe
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           not
           a
           Spanish
           ,
           but
           n
           
             an
             ordinary
             Flie
          
           or
           
             a
             grat
          
           ,
           flying
           casually
           into
           his
           mouth
           ,
           is
           said
           to
           haue
           stifled
           that
           proud
           Pope
           ,
           that
           made
           the
           
             highest
             State
          
           then
           in
           the
           
             Christian
             world
             stoope
          
           euen
           to
           the
           holding
           of
           his
           stirrop
           .
           And
           indeed
           ,
           o
           what
           is
           there
           so
           small
           ,
           that
           may
           not
           bee
           
             a
             mans
             bane
          
           ?
           The
           p
           paring
           of
           a
           toe
           ,
           the
           cutting
           of
           
             a
             corne
          
           ,
           the
           scratch
           of
           
             a
             naile
          
           ,
           the
           pricke
           of
           
             a
             pin
          
           ,
           haue
           beene
           
           sometime
           ,
           and
           q
           may
           againe
           be
           ,
           the
           meanes
           of
           
             a
             mans
             end
          
           .
           A
           r
           fish-bone
           ,
           a
           s
           grape-kernel
           ,
           some
           t
           
             one
             haire
          
           ,
           a
           u
           drop
           of
           water
           ,
           x
           his
           owne
           spittle
           ,
           let
           down
           vnwarily
           ,
           may
           choake
           him
           .
           a
           bad
           or
           
             vnwonted
             aire
          
           ,
           an
           
             euill
             smell
          
           ,
           a
           little
           smoake
           may
           soone
           stifle
           him
           .
           Man
           is
           
             as
             the
             grasse
          
           ,
           or
           
             as
             a
             flower
          
           (
           saith
           the
           b
           Prophet
           and
           the
           c
           Psalmist
           )
           which
           
             if
             the
             wind
             blow
             but
             on
             it
             ,
             it
             is
             by
             and
             by
             gone
             :
          
           and
           his
           life
           is
           as
           
             a
             candle
          
           ,
           or
           
             a
             taper
             ,
             a
             weake
             light
             ,
          
           that
           euery
           light
           ,
           not
           gust
           ,
           but
           puffe
           of
           winde
           is
           ready
           to
           
             blow
             out
          
           .
           Yea
           not
           some
           
             malignant
             blast
          
           ,
           or
           some
           
             euill
             breath
          
           onely
           ,
           but
           euen
           the
           want
           of
           breath
           ;
           nor
           the
           aire
           ,
           if
           it
           bee
           infected
           ,
           onely
           ,
           but
           the
           very
           d
           want
           of
           it
           to
           breathe
           with
           ,
           will
           soone
           make
           man
           cease
           to
           be
           ,
           and
           put
           a
           period
           to
           his
           life
           .
           e
           
             If
             thou
             withdrawest
          
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           
             from
             them
             their
             breath
             ,
             they
             die
             ,
             and
             returne
             againe
             to
             their
             dust
             .
          
        
         
           And
           what
           may
           this
           frailtie
           and
           vanitie
           of
           
             mans
             life
          
           then
           teach
           vs
           ?
        
         
           Surely
           ;
           first
           ,
           not
           to
           f
           make
           flesh
           our
           arme
           ;
           not
           to
           relie
           vpon
           so
           g
           feeble
           ,
           so
           fraile
           ,
           so
           fickle
           a
           stay
           ,
           as
           the
           life
           euen
           of
           the
           greatest
           ,
           or
           what
           euer
           he
           be
           ,
           h
           
             Cease
             from
             man
          
           (
           saith
           the
           
             Prophet
             )
             whose
             breath
             is
             in
             his
             nostrils
             :
             for
             what
             excellency
             is
             there
             in
             him
             ?
          
           And
           ,
           i
           
             Trust
             not
             in
             Princes
          
           (
           saith
           the
           
             Psalmist
             )
             nor
             in
             any
             
             Sonne
             of
             Man
             :
             for
             there
             is
          
           k
           no
           certainty
           of
           
             helpe
             by
             them
          
           .
           For
           their
           life
           is
           but
           l
           ablast
           ,
           and
           m
           
             whe●
             their
             breath
             goeth
             they
             die
             ,
             and
             returne
             to
             their
             dust
             ,
          
           euen
           n
           as
           others
           doe
           ;
           
             and
             then
             all
             their
             proiects
             perish
             with
             them
             .
          
           Men
           thinke
           themselues
           safe
           commonly
           ,
           if
           they
           can
           get
           into
           fauour
           with
           some
           
             great
             man
          
           ,
           or
           if
           they
           can
           by
           any
           meanes
           procure
           but
           the
           protection
           of
           such
           an
           one
           .
           But
           ,
           not
           to
           presse
           that
           which
           some
           yet
           well
           obserue
           ,
           that
           these
           proue
           oft
           but
           o
           
             vntoward
             shelters
          
           ,
           but
           
             v●safe
             sa●egards
          
           ;
           like
           the
           tree
           to
           the
           passenger
           ,
           that
           flieth
           to
           it
           for
           succour
           in
           a
           storme
           ,
           p
           that
           either
           braineth
           or
           ●ai●eth
           him
           with
           the
           fall
           of
           a
           bough
           ,
           who
           might
           haue
           beene
           safe
           enough
           ,
           had
           he
           not
           shrouded
           himselfe
           vnder
           it
           :
           Yea
           that
           q
           many
           are
           ruined
           together
           with
           them
           by
           their
           fall
           ,
           as
           the
           vnder-woods
           by
           the
           Oke
           or
           the
           Cedar
           when
           it
           is
           felled
           ,
           who
           neuer
           got
           by
           them
           while
           they
           stood
           .
           What
           surety
           of
           helpe
           or
           safety
           canst
           thou
           haue
           from
           those
           ,
           who
           haue
           no
           suretie
           ,
           r
           no
           more
           than
           thou
           hast
           ,
           of
           themselues
           ?
           Or
           what
           suretie
           or
           certainty
           can
           they
           haue
           of
           themselues
           ,
           whose
           life
           dependeth
           vpon
           so
           fickle
           a
           stay
           ,
           as
           is
           a
           puffe
           of
           wind
           ,
           or
           a
           blast
           of
           breath
           onely
           ?
           s
           Make
           
             God
             thy
             stay
          
           ,
           therefore
           ,
           who
           is
           t
           
             a
             rocke
             of
             eternitie
          
           ,
           or
           an
           
             euerlasting
             rocke
          
           :
           not
           man
           ,
           who
           is
           u
           so
           fraile
           ,
           
           so
           
             feeble
             a
             fabricke
          
           ,
           as
           being
           supported
           and
           
             held
             together
          
           but
           with
           x
           a
           
             little
             breath
          
           ,
           may
           with
           y
           as
           small
           a
           matter
           againe
           bee
           
             throwne
             downe
          
           and
           dissolued
           .
           And
           z
           take
           heed
           how
           for
           the
           procuring
           of
           the
           fauour
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           thou
           either
           watue
           the
           fauour
           ,
           or
           incurre
           the
           dispeasure
           of
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           consideration
           hereof
           should
           admonish
           vs
           with
           a
           Iob
           ,
           to
           liue
           in
           
             continuall
             expectation
          
           of
           our
           end
           ,
           in
           
             continuall
             preparation
          
           for
           the
           time
           of
           our
           decease
           ;
           since
           that
           b
           we
           
             know
             not
             how
             soone
          
           or
           
             how
             sodainly
          
           ,
           we
           may
           be
           smitten
           ;
           and
           wee
           know
           withall
           ,
           
             how
             small
             a
             matter
          
           is
           enough
           to
           
             make
             an
             end
          
           of
           vs.
           It
           was
           no
           euill
           counsell
           therefore
           ,
           that
           besides
           c
           
             Christian
             Diuines
          
           ,
           euen
           some
           d
           Heathen
           haue
           giuen
           ,
           that
           a
           man
           should
           doe
           well
           to
        
         
           
             Make
             euery
             day
             his
             dying
             day
             .
          
        
         
           Which
           yet
           is
           not
           so
           simply
           to
           be
           vnderstood
           ,
           that
           a
           man
           should
           
             euery
             day
          
           doe
           the
           same
           duties
           ,
           or
           be
           imployed
           in
           the
           same
           workes
           ,
           that
           hee
           either
           would
           or
           should
           ,
           if
           he
           knew
           it
           to
           be
           the
           
             last
             day
          
           of
           his
           life
           :
           But
           that
           in
           some
           other
           speciall
           respects
           he
           should
           make
           
             each
             day
          
           to
           be
           so
           (
           to
           wit
           ,
           as
           his
           
             dying
             day
          
           )
           to
           him
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           In
           the
           dispeeding
           of
           his
           repentance
           and
           e
           
             not
             delaying
          
           it
           
             a
             day
          
           longer
           .
           Be
           as
           carefull
           to
           f
           
             breake
             off
             thy
             sins
          
           this
           day
           and
           
             euery
             day
          
           ,
           as
           if
           it
           were
           to
           be
           thy
           
             dying
             day
          
           .
           Make
           
             euery
             day
          
           thy
           
             dying
             day
          
           ,
           by
           g
           
             dying
             vnto
             sinne
             euery
             day
          
           .
           It
           is
           an
           Heathen
           mans
           counsell
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           good
           and
           wholsome
           counsell
           ;
           h
           
             Let
             thy
             
             sinnes
             die
             in
             thee
             before
             thou
             diest
             .
          
           Let
           them
           
             dye
             before
             thee
          
           ;
           for
           i
           if
           they
           
             stay
             till
             death
          
           with
           thee
           ,
           if
           k
           
             thou
             diest
             before
             they
             die
          
           ,
           thou
           art
           sure
           to
           
             die
             eternally
          
           .
           And
           how
           knowest
           thou
           but
           that
           thou
           maist
           die
           before
           
             they
             die
          
           ,
           if
           
             they
             die
          
           not
           in
           thee
           
             this
             day
          
           ;
           when
           l
           thou
           hast
           
             no
             certainty
          
           of
           
             thy
             liues
             continuance
          
           till
           the
           
             next
             day
          
           ?
           And
           it
           is
           the
           aduice
           of
           a
           
             Iewish
             Rabbine
          
           ,
           and
           might
           well
           haue
           come
           from
           any
           Christian
           ;
           m
           
             Repent
             thee
             a
             day
             before
             thou
             diest
             .
          
           Not
           meaning
           thereby
           ,
           that
           a
           man
           should
           deferre
           and
           put
           off
           his
           repentance
           ,
           till
           he
           lay
           ,
           as
           hee
           thought
           ,
           now
           a
           dying
           ,
           or
           not
           like
           to
           liue
           aboue
           
             a
             day
          
           longer
           :
           But
           that
           n
           he
           should
           this
           present
           
             day
             repent
          
           ,
           and
           o
           not
           put
           it
           off
           till
           the
           
             next
             day
          
           ;
           because
           before
           the
           
             next
             day
          
           ,
           for
           ought
           he
           knoweth
           ,
           he
           may
           die
           ;
           p
           hee
           
             knoweth
             not
             what
          
           or
           where
           he
           shall
           be
           
             to
             morrow
          
           .
           As
           Solomon
           therefore
           aduiseth
           him
           ,
           that
           hath
           intangled
           himselfe
           by
           suretiship
           ,
           so
           doe
           thou
           much
           more
           ;
           (
           for
           the
           matter
           more
           concerneth
           thee
           )
           q
           
             Giue
             no
             sleepe
             to
             thine
             eyes
             ,
             nor
             flumber
             to
             thine
             eye-lids
             ,
          
           before
           thou
           hast
           r
           by
           sincere
           and
           
             serious
             repentance
             wound
          
           thy selfe
           and
           thy
           soule
           againe
           out
           of
           those
           
             snares
             of
             Satan
          
           ,
           s
           which
           by
           the
           practise
           of
           sinne
           thou
           hast
           
             entangled
             thy selfe
          
           in
           .
        
         
           2
           In
           the
           shunning
           and
           auoiding
           of
           all
           euill
           .
           Be
           as
           carefull
           to
           
             shunne
             sinne
             e●ery
             day
          
           ,
           as
           thou
           wouldest
           
           be
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           to
           be
           thy
           
             dying
             day
          
           ,
           t
           
             Doe
             not
             that
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             to
             day
             ,
             that
             thou
             maist
             repent
             thee
             of
             to
             morrow
             .
          
           Yea
           ,
           
             doe
             not
             that
          
           ,
           (
           say
           I
           )
           
             to
             day
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             too
             late
             to
             repent
             of
             tomorrow
             .
          
           There
           is
           hardly
           any
           man
           to
           be
           found
           so
           desperate
           ,
           if
           he
           beleeue
           at
           least
           that
           he
           hath
           a
           soule
           to
           saue
           ,
           that
           u
           would
           wilfully
           abandon
           himselfe
           to
           any
           euill
           act
           ,
           if
           he
           thought
           but
           that
           he
           should
           or
           might
           die
           instantly
           vpon
           the
           deed
           done
           .
           When
           thou
           shalt
           therefore
           be
           incited
           to
           the
           doing
           of
           ought
           ,
           that
           thy
           conscience
           enformeth
           thee
           to
           bee
           euill
           ,
           doe
           but
           thinke
           thus
           seriously
           with
           thy selfe
           ;
           
             Would
             I
             doe
             this
             ,
             if
             I
             were
             to
             die
             to
             day
             ,
             or
             if
             I
             were
             to
             die
             as
             soone
             as
             it
             is
             done
             ?
          
           And
           yet
           how
           knowest
           thou
           ,
           but
           that
           thou
           maist
           die
           in
           the
           doing
           of
           it
           ,
           but
           that
           this
           puffe
           of
           thy
           life
           may
           
             puffe
             out
          
           ,
           ere
           it
           be
           done
           ?
           Thou
           maist
           be
           taken
           with
           a
           Bal●asar
           ,
           b
           Ammo●
           ,
           and
           c
           Ela
           ,
           besides
           d
           others
           ,
           amids
           thy
           cups
           ,
           or
           vpon
           thine
           ale-bench
           :
           Thou
           maist
           with
           e
           Zimri
           and
           Cozbi
           (
           and
           the
           like
           hath
           befallen
           others
           too
           )
           be
           smitten
           f
           in
           thine
           
             vncleane
             bed
          
           ,
           yea
           in
           the
           g
           act
           of
           thine
           vncleannesse
           :
           Thou
           maist
           with
           *
           Core
           and
           his
           complices
           ,
           be
           swept
           away
           ,
           in
           thy
           
             rebellious
             courses
          
           against
           Minister
           or
           Magistrate
           ;
           or
           amids
           thy
           
             friuolous
             suites
          
           ,
           and
           
             malicious
             pursuits
          
           of
           
           thy
           brethren
           .
           Thy
           lie
           ,
           or
           thy
           vaine
           oath
           may
           bee
           thy
           h
           
             last
             word
          
           ;
           thy
           
             drunken
             health
          
           thy
           i
           
             last
             draught
          
           ;
           thy
           fraud
           ,
           or
           thine
           oppression
           thy
           
             last
             deed
          
           .
           In
           k
           the
           twinckling
           of
           an
           eye
           ,
           in
           the
           turning
           of
           an
           hand
           ,
           while
           thou
           art
           but
           l
           
             looking
             after
          
           some
           sinne
           ,
           as
           m
           
             Lots
             wife
             looking
             to
             Sodome
          
           ward
           ,
           (
           n
           
             She
             turned
             her
             but
             ,
             and
             she
             was
             turned
             )
          
           maist
           thou
           sodainly
           be
           snatched
           away
           ,
           with
           thy
           p
           
             minde
             defiled
          
           ,
           though
           thy
           hand
           yet
           vnsoiled
           .
           And
           certainly
           q
           no
           meanes
           would
           be
           more
           effectuall
           to
           keepe
           vs
           continually
           within
           compasse
           ,
           than
           the
           serious
           consideration
           of
           the
           frailtie
           and
           the
           vncertaintie
           of
           our
           life
           ,
           how
           soone
           and
           how
           sodainly
           it
           may
           r
           flit
           away
           from
           vs.
           
        
         
           3.
           
           In
           embracing
           of
           all
           
             good
             occasions
          
           .
           Be
           s
           as
           carefull
           
             euery
             day
          
           to
           entertaine
           any
           occasion
           of
           wel-doing
           ,
           as
           thou
           wouldest
           be
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           to
           bee
           thy
           
             dying
             day
          
           .
           t
           
             Let
             vs
             doe
             good
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Apostle
           )
           
             while
             wee
             haue
          
           u
           
             time
             ,
             and
             opportunitie
          
           so
           to
           doe
           :
           considering
           that
           if
           we
           neglect
           it
           now
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           offered
           ,
           wee
           know
           not
           whether
           it
           will
           euer
           be
           offered
           vs
           againe
           .
           x
           
             Say
             not
          
           (
           saith
           Solomon
           )
           
             to
             thy
             neighbour
             ,
             Goe
             and
             come
             againe
             to
             morrow
             ,
             if
             thou
             hast
             that
             by
             thee
             wherewith
          
           
           
             thou
             maist
             helpe
             him
          
           .
           And
           ,
           a
           
             whatsoeuer
             thou
             doest
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             doe
             it
          
           ,
           as
           
             with
             all
             diligence
             ;
             for
             there
             is
             no
             
             worke
             ,
             nor
             wisdome
             in
             the
             graue
             that
             thou
             goest
             to
             :
          
           so
           
             without
             delay
          
           ;
           because
           b
           
             thou
             knowest
             not
             what
             euill
             may
             come
             ,
          
           that
           may
           cut
           off
           all
           
             future
             opportunitie
          
           of
           wel-doing
           ,
           either
           by
           taking
           thee
           from
           the
           meanes
           ,
           or
           the
           meanes
           from
           thee
           .
           And
           as
           c
           
             he
             that
             obserueth
             the
             wind
             shall
             neuer
             sow
          
           ;
           so
           
             hee
             that
             regardeth
             the
             clouds
             shall
             neuer
             reape
             .
          
           But
           especially
           d
           neglect
           not
           the
           meanes
           of
           that
           
             maine
             worke
          
           ,
           (
           f
           
             To
             day
          
           ,
           saith
           he
           ,
           
             if
             you
             heare
             his
             voice
             ,
             harden
             not
             your
             hearts
             ,
          
           but
           g
           hearken
           :
           And
           ,
           h
           
             Now
             while
             the
             acceptable
             time
             is
             ,
             while
             it
             is
             the
             day
             of
             saluation
             ,
             we
             beseech
             you
             ,
             receiue
             not
             the
             grace
             of
             God
          
           offered
           you
           
             in
             vaine
             .
          
           )
           of
           i
           
             laying
             a
             good
             foundation
             for
             the
             obtaining
             of
             life
             eternall
          
           ;
           and
           the
           k
           
             laying
             hold
          
           of
           all
           opportunities
           that
           may
           tend
           thereunto
           .
           For
           this
           ,
           if
           it
           bee
           not
           first
           
             done
             ,
             dismall
          
           and
           desperate
           will
           thine
           estate
           be
           ,
           if
           
             death
             sodainly
          
           surprise
           thee
           .
           Whereas
           if
           it
           be
           
             once
             well
          
           and
           substantially
           done
           ,
           l
           death
           shall
           neuer
           be
           able
           to
           raze
           or
           to
           
             rip
             vp
          
           thy
           worke
           ,
           come
           it
           neuer
           so
           soone
           after
           ,
           or
           so
           suddenly
           vpon
           thee
           .
           It
           is
           with
           vs
           in
           this
           case
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           for
           our
           wills
           .
           A
           man
           that
           hath
           not
           his
           
             Will
             made
          
           before
           hand
           ,
           if
           hee
           bee
           sodainly
           taken
           with
           
             dead
             Palsie
          
           or
           lethargie
           ,
           is
           m
           thereby
           vtterly
           disabled
           to
           doe
           ought
           therein
           ,
           or
           to
           settle
           his
           estate
           .
           Whereas
           if
           a
           man
           haue
           before
           time
           made
           and
           finished
           his
           will
           ,
           though
           he
           haue
           no
           time
           or
           abilitie
           ,
           being
           so
           taken
           ,
           now
           to
           recognize
           it
           ,
           yet
           n
           his
           will
           standeth
           firme
           and
           good
           still
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           and
           shall
           as
           well
           take
           effect
           as
           if
           he
           had
           seriously
           now
           againe
           considered
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           signed
           and
           sealed
           it
           the
           second
           
           time
           .
           In
           like
           manner
           ,
           those
           that
           neglect
           now
           the
           meanes
           of
           their
           saluation
           ,
           in
           hope
           of
           hauing
           them
           ,
           and
           making
           vse
           of
           them
           time
           enough
           hereafter
           ,
           if
           either
           death
           ,
           or
           some
           o
           such
           
             disease
             ,
             soduinly
             smite
          
           them
           ,
           as
           is
           wont
           to
           depriue
           of
           ,
           or
           disturbe
           the
           vse
           of
           vnderstanding
           and
           reason
           ,
           they
           are
           thereby
           vtterly
           disabled
           to
           do
           ought
           therein
           .
           Whereas
           those
           that
           are
           now
           carefull
           to
           make
           a
           good
           vse
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           neglect
           not
           the
           grace
           and
           mercy
           of
           God
           therein
           now
           vouchsafed
           them
           ,
           hauing
           p
           reconciled
           themselues
           
             to
             God
          
           once
           ,
           and
           made
           their
           
             peace
             with
             him
          
           ;
           though
           death
           should
           take
           them
           so
           suddenly
           ,
           that
           they
           haue
           not
           time
           so
           much
           as
           to
           thinke
           on
           it
           ,
           yet
           their
           q
           
             peace
             with
             God
          
           shall
           stand
           firme
           and
           sure
           ;
           nor
           shall
           the
           want
           of
           opportunitie
           or
           abilitie
           to
           doe
           ought
           then
           ,
           any
           whit
           impeach
           or
           impaire
           their
           euerlasting
           wel-doing
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           In
           the
           manner
           of
           doing
           all
           that
           we
           doe
           .
           Bee
           carefull
           to
           doe
           ,
           whatsoeuer
           it
           is
           that
           thou
           doest
           ,
           r
           as
           sincerely
           ,
           as
           vprightly
           ,
           as
           thou
           wouldest
           doe
           it
           ,
           if
           thou
           wert
           to
           doe
           it
           ,
           when
           thou
           art
           
             a
             dying
          
           ;
           or
           as
           thou
           wouldest
           doe
           it
           ,
           if
           thou
           thoughtest
           thou
           shouldest
           die
           as
           soone
           as
           it
           were
           done
           ,
           that
           
             presently
             after
          
           the
           doing
           of
           it
           ,
           thou
           shouldest
           
             depart
             this
             world
          
           ,
           and
           goe
           to
           giue
           an
           account
           of
           the
           doing
           of
           it
           to
           God.
           So
           doe
           ,
           I
           say
           :
           for
           s
           so
           (
           for
           ought
           thou
           knowest
           )
           thou
           maist
           doe
           .
           And
           therefore
           ,
           not
           only
           ,
           when
           thou
           hearest
           now
           ,
           so
           heare
           ,
           as
           if
           this
           were
           the
           
             last
             Sermon
          
           thou
           should
           heare
           ,
           as
           with
           t
           Eutychus
           it
           had
           like
           to
           haue
           beene
           ;
           so
           pray
           ,
           when
           thou
           praiest
           ,
           as
           if
           that
           might
           proue
           the
           
             last
             prayer
          
           thou
           shouldest
           make
           ;
           (
           for
           the
           manner
           of
           preferring
           and
           
           commencing
           of
           it
           ,
           I
           meane
           ,
           though
           not
           for
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           
             suit
             commenced
          
           )
           but
           so
           u
           eat
           and
           drinke
           too
           ,
           as
           if
           that
           might
           bee
           thy
           *
           last
           meale
           ;
           so
           buy
           and
           sell
           too
           ,
           as
           if
           euery
           bargaine
           thou
           makest
           ,
           might
           be
           the
           last
           that
           euer
           thou
           shouldest
           make
           :
           yea
           ,
           so
           follow
           not
           thy
           
             serious
             affaires
          
           onely
           ,
           but
           thy
           
             lawfull
             disports
          
           and
           delights
           too
           ,
           as
           one
           that
           maist
           x
           
             in
             an
             instant
          
           as
           well
           be
           taken
           away
           ,
           (
           thy
           life
           lying
           in
           thy
           breath
           ,
           and
           thy
           breath
           being
           but
           a
           blast
           )
           as
           others
           not
           a
           few
           before
           thee
           haue
           beene
           ,
           either
           y
           in
           the
           one
           ,
           or
           z
           in
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           much
           also
           for
           the
           
             second
             Particular
          
           here
           considerable
           ,
           the
           
             manner
             how
          
           hee
           died
           ,
           and
           the
           frailtie
           of
           
             mans
             life
          
           in
           the
           phrase
           here
           implyed
           .
        
         
           The
           
             third
             Particular
          
           followeth
           ;
           and
           that
           is
           the
           
             time
             when
          
           he
           dyed
           .
        
         
           
             He
             dyed
          
           ,
           (
           saith
           my
           
             Text
             )
          
           .
        
         
           1.
           a
           
             in
             a
             good
             old
             age
          
           ,
           or
           
             with
             a
             good
             hoary
             head
          
           ;
           for
           that
           the
           b
           Word
           properly
           and
           primarily
           soundeth
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           accounted
           c
           a
           further
           degree
           than
           the
           former
           .
        
         
           Good
           (
           I
           say
           )
           not
           (
           as
           some
           )
           morally
           ;
           as
           d
           
             well
             spent
             ,
             well
             employed
          
           ,
           replenisht
           with
           deeds
           and
           
             emploiments
             
             spiritually
             good
          
           :
           (
           albeit
           ,
           no
           doubt
           ,
           
             Abrahams
             old
             age
          
           also
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           his
           
             younger
             time
          
           so
           was
           :
           )
        
         
           But
           good
           rather
           naturally
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
        
         
           Either
           e
           great
           :
           for
           in
           length
           and
           greatnesse
           in
           part
           consisteth
           the
           goodnesse
           of
           age
           ;
           and
           f
           goodnesse
           in
           that
           sense
           goeth
           sometime
           for
           greatnesse
           :
        
         
           Or
           g
           
             quiet
             ,
             happy
          
           ,
           and
           prosperous
           ;
           as
           it
           is
           said
           elsewhere
           ,
           h
           in
           peace
           and
           prosperitie
           :
        
         
           Or
           i
           haile
           and
           healthy
           ,
           as
           wee
           say
           ;
           k
           free
           for
           the
           most
           part
           from
           such
           l
           annoiances
           and
           troublesome
           infirmities
           ,
           as
           that
           age
           is
           wont
           to
           be
           infested
           withall
           :
           though
           not
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           ,
           so
           fresh
           and
           vigorous
           as
           m
           Moses
           ,
           or
           so
           able
           and
           actiue
           as
           n
           Caleb
           ,
           are
           neere
           their
           ends
           said
           to
           haue
           beene
           :
        
         
           Or
           o
           all
           these
           ;
           for
           the
           word
           may
           well
           include
           them
           all
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           p
           
             Old
             and
             full
          
           ;
           not
           q
           of
           grace
           and
           goodnesse
           ,
           as
           some
           :
           (
           that
           is
           most
           true
           indeed
           also
           of
           Abraham
           ,
           but
           seemeth
           not
           here
           intended
           :
           )
        
         
           But
           of
           daies
           ,
           or
           of
           yeeres
           ;
           as
           it
           is
           expressed
           r
           elsewhere
           :
           hauing
           liued
           euen
           as
           long
           as
           s
           himselfe
           desired
           ,
           or
           
             so
             long
          
           (
           as
           we
           say
           )
           
             as
             heart
             could
             wish
          
           .
        
         
           Whence
           the
           Point
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           Generall
           wee
           may
           obserue
           ,
           is
           this
           ,
           that
           euen
        
         
           
             The
             longest
             liuers
             die
             at
             last
             .
          
           a
           
             The
             daies
             of
             mans
             life
             are
             seuenty
             yeeres
          
           ;
           saith
           the
           Psalmist
           .
           But
           Abraham
           had
           liued
           a
           whole
           b
           hundred
           to
           that
           ,
           and
           yet
           at
           length
           ,
           you
           see
           ,
           
             he
             dieth
          
           .
           Yea
           that
           is
           the
           conclusion
           
           still
           (
           c
           one
           onely
           excepted
           )
           with
           all
           those
           Ancients
           that
           liued
           so
           long
           before
           the
           floud
           ,
           (
           not
           three
           or
           foure
           times
           ,
           as
           they
           say
           of
           d
           Nestor
           and
           some
           e
           other
           ,
           but
           nine
           or
           ten
           times
           as
           long
           as
           the
           longest
           ordinary
           liuers
           liue
           now
           adaies
           )
           f
           
             And
             hee
             died
          
           .
        
         
           Nor
           is
           it
           any
           maruell
           ,
           that
           they
           so
           doe
           .
        
         
           For
           first
           ,
           we
           are
           of
           g
           a
           
             glassie
             matter
          
           ,
           of
           a
           very
           
             brittle
             mettall
          
           :
           h
           ready
           with
           euery
           
             light
             dash
          
           to
           cracke
           asunder
           ,
           to
           fl●e
           in
           pieces
           .
           And
           *
           
             wee
             walke
             amids
             many
             casualties
          
           ;
           ready
           euer
           anon
           to
           seize
           on
           vs
           ;
           and
           any
           one
           alone
           enough
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           vs.
           And
           i
           
             the
             pot
          
           (
           as
           the
           Prouerbe
           is
           )
           
             goeth
             so
             of●
             to
             the
             well
             ,
             that
             at
             length
             it
             commeth
             home
             broken
          
           ;
           or
           rather
           ,
           that
           it
           neuer
           commeth
           home
           againe
           .
           k
           
             Death
             lieth
             euery
             where
          
           ,
           in
           euery
           corner
           ,
           
             in
             waite
          
           for
           vs
           ;
           euen
           l
           in
           those
           things
           themselues
           that
           are
           h
           the
           meanes
           to
           
             maintaine
             life
          
           .
           Not
           m
           a
           crum
           of
           that
           bread
           we
           eat
           ,
           nor
           n
           a
           drop
           of
           that
           we
           drinke
           ,
           but
           ,
           if
           it
           goe
           but
           
             an
             haires
             bredth
          
           awry
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           our
           bane
           .
           There
           is
           not
           o
           a
           bare
           step
           ,
           or
           a
           pace
           only
           
             betweene
             death
             and
             vs
          
           ,
           as
           David
           speaketh
           ;
           or
           an
           p
           hand-bredth
           ,
           some
           few
           inches
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           said
           of
           those
           that
           be
           
           at
           sea
           :
           but
           euen
           scarce
           a
           
             nailes
             bredth
          
           ,
           yea
           or
           an
           
             haires
             bredth
          
           betweene
           vs
           and
           it
           ,
           if
           not
           q
           
             at
             all
             times
          
           ,
           yet
           at
           
             many
             times
          
           more
           at
           least
           ,
           than
           wee
           are
           vsually
           aware
           of
           .
           And
           it
           is
           no
           maruell
           therefore
           if
           r
           
             death
             meet
             with
          
           vs
           ,
           or
           
             light
             vpon
          
           vs
           at
           length
           :
           it
           is
           maruell
           rather
           that
           it
           
             misseth
             of
          
           vs
           so
           long
           .
        
         
           Besides
           that
           ,
           s
           wee
           our selues
           also
           helpe
           oft
           to
           hasten
           our
           
             owne
             end
          
           ,
           while
           wee
           betray
           our selues
           to
           him
           ,
           who
           lieth
           thus
           
             in
             wait
          
           for
           vs
           ,
           by
           wilfull
           distemper
           ,
           by
           disorder
           ,
           by
           misdiet
           .
           As
           not
           
             one
             apple
          
           therefore
           of
           an
           
             hundred
             hangeth
             on
          
           the
           tree
           to
           full
           maturitie
           ,
           or
           so
           long
           ,
           till
           it
           
             drop
             downe
          
           with
           ripenesse
           alone
           and
           its
           owne
           weight
           ,
           but
           either
           it
           is
           
             pluckt
             off
          
           with
           the
           hand
           ,
           or
           
             blowne
             downe
          
           with
           the
           wind
           ,
           or
           preuented
           of
           its
           maturitie
           by
           some
           one
           meanes
           or
           other
           :
           not
           one
           glasse
           ,
           or
           earthen
           pot
           of
           an
           hundred
           ,
           that
           lasteth
           so
           long
           as
           it
           might
           ,
           but
           by
           some
           mischance
           or
           other
           it
           commeth
           to
           its
           bane
           :
           So
           t
           not
           
             one
             man
          
           among
           an
           hundred
           (
           what
           and
           I
           should
           say
           a
           
             thousand
             ?
          
           )
           that
           u
           fulfilleth
           his
           
             naturall
             course
          
           ,
           that
           liueth
           so
           long
           as
           in
           course
           of
           nature
           he
           well
           might
           ,
           but
           hath
           his
           
             life
             shortned
          
           ,
           and
           his
           
             end
             bastned
          
           x
           by
           sword
           ,
           by
           stresse
           ,
           by
           sorrow
           ,
           by
           sadnesse
           ,
           by
           surfet
           ,
           by
           sicknesse
           ,
           by
           some
           one
           such
           casualty
           or
           other
           .
        
         
         
           2.
           
           a
           We
           carry
           euery
           one
           of
           vs
           our
           owne
           bane
           
           about
           vs.
           Euery
           one
           (
           say
           some
           Chymicks
           )
           hath
           his
           owne
           balsome
           within
           him
           :
           but
           b
           euery
           one
           of
           vs
           (
           sure
           I
           am
           )
           hath
           within
           him
           his
           own
           bane
           ;
           and
           that
           that
           will
           be
           sure
           at
           length
           to
           make
           an
           end
           of
           him
           ,
           though
           no
           such
           casualtie
           ,
           as
           before
           wee
           spake
           of
           ,
           should
           befall
           him
           .
           c
           
             We
             are
             of
             a
             glassie
             matter
          
           ;
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           nay
           ,
           d
           were
           it
           so
           onely
           ,
           
             we
             were
             better
          
           and
           safer
           th●n
           now
           we
           are
           .
           For
           e
           a
           
             Venice
             glasse
          
           ,
           as
           brittle
           as
           it
           is
           ,
           yet
           if
           it
           be
           charily
           kept
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           carefully
           
             set
             vp
          
           ,
           if
           it
           stand
           
             shut
             vp
          
           vnder
           locke
           and
           key
           ,
           out
           of
           vse
           ,
           out
           of
           harmes
           way
           ,
           it
           may
           
             hold
             out
          
           many
           ages
           ,
           it
           might
           last
           peraduenture
           euen
           as
           long
           as
           the
           world
           it selfe
           is
           like
           to
           last
           .
           But
           f
           shut
           you
           
             vp
             man
          
           neuer
           so
           charily
           ,
           keepe
           him
           neuer
           so
           carefully
           ,
           hee
           may
           ,
           nay
           he
           will
           
             drop
             away
          
           for
           all
           that
           ,
           he
           hath
           poison
           within
           him
           ,
           that
           will
           at
           length
           make
           an
           end
           of
           him
           .
           He
           was
           bred
           and
           borne
           with
           a
           dangerous
           ,
           with
           a
           
             desperate
             disease
          
           on
           him
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           by
           no
           care
           or
           art
           of
           man
           he
           can
           be
           cured
           of
           or
           recouered
           .
           g
           
             Old
             age
          
           (
           said
           he
           sometime
           )
           
             is
             it selfe
             a
             disease
          
           ;
           and
           h
           
             a
             disease
             that
             cannot
             he
             cured
             .
          
           But
           i
           
             this
             life
             it selfe
          
           (
           saith
           an
           ancient
           Father
           )
           
             is
             a
             disease
          
           ;
           and
           such
           
             a
             disease
          
           as
           we
           
             must
             all
          
           of
           vs
           needes
           one
           day
           
             dye
             of
          
           .
           l
           
             Thou
             art
             sure
             to
             die
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             not
             because
             thou
             art
             sicke
             ,
             but
             because
             thou
             liuest
             .
          
           For
           m
           sicke
           a
           man
           may
           
           
           
           
           
           
           be
           ,
           and
           yet
           
             not
             die
          
           of
           it
           :
           (
           not
           to
           adde
           ,
           that
           n
           
             a
             disease
          
           hath
           sometime
           
             delaid
             death
             .
          
           )
           But
           o
           
             what
             man
             liueth
             ,
             and
             shall
          
           p
           
             not
             see
             death
          
           ?
           that
           is
           ,
           
             who
             liueth
             ,
             and
             shall
             not
             die
             ?
          
           q
           The
           
             whole
             course
             of
             our
             life
          
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           
             a
             passage
             to
             death
          
           :
           the
           seuerall
           r
           
             ages
             of
             our
             life
          
           so
           many
           seuerall
           
             degrees
             of
             death
          
           :
           s
           we
           are
           
             dying
             daily
          
           t
           
             by
             degrees
          
           .
           No
           sooner
           are
           we
           (
           I
           say
           not
           ,
           u
           borne
           ,
           but
           euen
           )
           *
           bred
           ,
           but
           wee
           are
           dying
           and
           decaying
           .
           Euery
           x
           minute
           and
           moment
           that
           seemeth
           
             added
             to
          
           our
           life
           ,
           y
           
             taketh
             from
          
           it
           .
           For
           our
           life
           it
           is
           as
           a
           taper
           ,
           that
           being
           
             once
             lighted
          
           ,
           neuer
           linneth
           spending
           ,
           till
           it
           be
           
             wasted
             all
          
           at
           last
           :
           as
           
             the
             houre-glasse
          
           ,
           that
           being
           
             once
             turned
          
           and
           set
           a
           running
           ,
           
             neuer
             staieth
          
           ,
           till
           the
           sand
           be
           
             all
             out
          
           .
        
         
           So
           that
           considering
           as
           well
           the
           varietie
           of
           casualties
           ,
           that
           we
           are
           all
           subiect
           vnto
           ,
           as
           our
           owne
           frailty
           and
           mortalitie
           ,
           that
           we
           are
           brod
           and
           bor●e
           z
           
           with
           ,
           it
           is
           no
           maruell
           if
           the
           
             longest
             liuers
          
           of
           vs
           
             die
             at
             last
          
           ,
           it
           is
           maruell
           rather
           that
           any
           of
           vs
           
             liue
             so
             long
          
           .
        
         
           Now
           this
           may
           first
           teach
           vs
           ,
           not
           to
           please
           our
           
           selues
           with
           a
           conceit
           of
           
             long
             life
             ,
             Why
             may
             not
             wee
             liue
             as
             long
             as
             such
             and
             such
             ?
          
           To
           omit
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           a
           thing
           altogether
           a
           vncertaine
           .
           For
           b
           
             who
             can
             tell
             a
             man
             what
             shall
             be
             ?
             Certaine
          
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           c
           
             first
             or
             last
          
           ,
           d
           
             die
             we
             must
             ,
             liue
          
           wee
           neuer
           so
           long
           .
           As
           nothing
           more
           vncertaine
           than
           
             how
             long
          
           we
           shall
           liue
           :
           so
           e
           nothing
           more
           certaine
           than
           that
           once
           f
           wee
           
             shall
             die
          
           .
           g
           
             As
             sure
             as
             death
          
           :
           we
           say
           .
           And
           h
           
             it
             neuer
             stayeth
             long
             ,
             that
             commeth
             at
             last
             .
             Stay
             death
          
           neuer
           so
           long
           ,
           before
           it
           come
           ,
           it
           will
           seeme
           to
           
             come
             ouer-soone
          
           when
           it
           commeth
           ,
           to
           those
           that
           desire
           it
           not
           ,
           and
           at
           last
           
             come
             it
             will.
          
           And
           i
           
             last
             life
          
           neuer
           s●
           
             〈…〉
             ng
          
           ,
           it
           will
           seeme
           but
           short
           ,
           when
           it
           is
           once
           ouer
           .
           k
           
             When
             it
             is
             gone
          
           ,
           (
           saith
           the
           Psalmist
           )
           
             it
             is
             but
             as
          
           l
           
             a
             watch
             in
             the
             night
          
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           it
           should
           admonish
           vs
           to
           take
           heed
           how
           we
           grow
           too
           farre
           in
           loue
           ,
           either
           with
           this
           life
           it selfe
           ,
           or
           with
           the
           things
           of
           
             this
             life
          
           .
           Since
           that
           ,
           though
           we
           enioy
           them
           neuer
           so
           long
           ,
           yet
           wee
           must
           leaue
           them
           at
           last
           .
           For
           m
           
             we
             brought
             them
             not
             with
          
           
           
           
           
           
           
             vs
             into
             this
             world
             ;
             and
             it
             is
             certaine
             that
          
           n
           
             we
             cannot
             carry
             them
             out
             of
             the
             world
          
           with
           vs.
           If
           
             they
             leaue
             not
             vs
          
           while
           we
           
             liue
             here
          
           ,
           o
           which
           oft
           also
           they
           doe
           ;
           yet
           p
           we
           cannot
           but
           
             leaue
             them
          
           when
           we
           
             goe
             hence
          
           .
           For
           all
           the
           things
           of
           this
           life
           must
           needs
           leaue
           vs
           ,
           when
           our
           life
           it selfe
           leaueth
           vs
           ,
           whereupon
           they
           depend
           .
           Let
           vs
           so
           hold
           ,
           and
           vse
           these
           things
           therefore
           ,
           that
           we
           q
           
             set
             not
             our
             hearts
             on
             them
          
           ;
           that
           we
           suffer
           not
           our
           r
           affections
           to
           be
           glewed
           to
           them
           .
           Let
           them
           s
           
             hang
             loose
          
           about
           vs
           ,
           that
           when
           wee
           shall
           come
           to
           be
           stript
           of
           them
           ,
           they
           may
           ,
           as
           our
           garments
           ,
           goe
           off
           with
           ease
           .
           Otherwise
           if
           they
           t
           cleaue
           and
           
             sticke
             fast
          
           to
           our
           soules
           ,
           as
           cloathes
           are
           wont
           to
           doe
           to
           an
           
             vlcerous
             body
          
           ,
           the
           parting
           one
           day
           ,
           with
           them
           ,
           which
           we
           can
           by
           no
           meanes
           auoid
           ,
           will
           be
           u
           as
           painfull
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           as
           if
           our
           skin
           were
           pulled
           from
           our
           flesh
           ,
           or
           x
           our
           
             flesh
             ●orne
          
           from
           our
           bones
           ,
           or
           rather
           y
           as
           if
           some
           peece
           of
           our
           soule
           were
           reaft
           away
           together
           with
           them
           .
        
         
           Yea
           for
           life
           it selfe
           ,
           if
           we
           loue
           it
           ,
           (
           as
           a
           
             who
             loueth
             not
             life
             ?
          
           )
           let
           vs
           loue
           that
           life
           ,
           that
           is
           b
           
             life
             indeed
          
           ,
           and
           deserueth
           well
           that
           name
           .
           For
           this
           life
           that
           we
           
           liue
           here
           ,
           is
           in
           a
           manner
           c
           
             no
             life
          
           ;
           it
           is
           d
           
             life
             in
             name
          
           ,
           but
           
             in
             deed
          
           and
           truth
           e
           death
           .
           It
           is
           no
           
             true
             life
          
           that
           cannot
           
             ouercome
             death
          
           ;
           that
           
             yeeldeth
             to
          
           ,
           that
           
             ●endeth
             to
          
           ,
           that
           
             endeth
             in
             death
          
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           the
           consideration
           hereof
           should
           cause
           vs
           to
           f
           surcease
           and
           cast
           off
           this
           our
           
             immoderate
             care
          
           for
           the
           
             things
             of
             this
             life
          
           .
           As
           it
           hath
           beene
           said
           by
           way
           of
           reproofe
           of
           some
           people
           ,
           that
           they
           vsed
           to
           g
           build
           as
           if
           they
           looked
           to
           
             liue
             for
             euer
          
           :
           so
           it
           may
           well
           be
           said
           of
           many
           among
           vs
           ,
           that
           they
           h
           purchase
           ,
           and
           i
           build
           ,
           and
           k
           
             gather
             goods
          
           together
           ,
           as
           if
           they
           made
           full
           account
           to
           l
           
             liue
             euer
          
           to
           enioy
           them
           .
           Whereas
           neither
           are
           these
           things
           able
           to
           lengthen
           their
           liues
           :
           for
           m
           
             haue
             a
             man
             neuer
             so
             much
             of
             them
             ,
             his
             life
             dependeth
             not
             thereupon
             :
          
           nor
           to
           keepe
           them
           
             from
             death
          
           :
           for
           n
           
             no
             price
             can
             procure
          
           any
           
             immunitie
             from
             it
          
           :
           nor
           to
           saue
           them
           
             in
             death
          
           ;
           for
           o
           
             riches
             auaile
             not
             in
             the
             day
             of
             wrath
             :
          
           nor
           to
           auaile
           them
           
             after
             death
          
           ;
           for
           there
           will
           then
           be
           
             no
             vse
          
           of
           them
           .
           And
           for
           men
           therefore
           p
           to
           beat
           their
           braines
           so
           much
           with
           thought
           and
           care
           for
           these
           things
           ,
           and
           q
           to
           take
           such
           paines
           ,
           as
           so
           many
           doe
           ,
           for
           the
           compassing
           of
           them
           ,
           is
           but
           r
           to
           t●ile
           and
           moile
           about
           that
           ,
           that
           they
           must
           leaue
           to
           others
           at
           length
           ,
           and
           to
           inherite
           s
           nothing
           but
           t
           folly
           and
           u
           vanitie
           themselues
           ,
           when
           others
           ,
           x
           they
           
             know
             not
          
           who
           ,
           y
           inherit
           the
           fruit
           of
           their
           labours
           .
        
         
         
           Lastly
           ,
           this
           might
           teach
           vs
           
             not
             to
             feare
             death
          
           .
           a
           
             It
             is
             a
             fond
             thing
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             to
             feare
             that
             ,
             that
             cannot
             be
          
           
           auoided
           .
           A
           folly
           it
           is
           to
           trouble
           &
           turmoile
           our selues
           with
           feare
           and
           care
           about
           that
           ,
           that
           by
           no
           thought
           or
           forecast
           wee
           can
           shunne
           or
           
             shift
             off
          
           .
           But
           such
           is
           death
           .
           b
           
             Delayed
             it
             may
             be
          
           ,
           but
           
             auoided
             it
             cannot
             be
          
           .
           And
           c
           be
           it
           nouer
           so
           
             long
             put
             off
          
           ,
           yet
           d
           it
           will
           
             come
             at
             last
          
           .
           As
           an
           ancient
           Father
           therefore
           well
           and
           wisely
           aduiseth
           ;
           e
           
             Feare
             not
             that
             ,
             which
             whether
             thou
             wilt
             or
             no
             ,
             will
             be
             ;
             feare
             that
             rather
             ,
             which
             if
             thou
             thy selfe
             wilt
             not
             ,
             shall
             neuer
             be
             .
          
           That
           is
           ,
           
             feare
             not
          
           this
           
             temporall
             death
          
           ,
           the
           death
           of
           thy
           body
           ,
           which
           of
           it selfe
           cannot
           hurt
           thee
           ,
           and
           by
           no
           meanes
           or
           care
           of
           thine
           can
           be
           preuented
           :
           but
           feare
           that
           
             eternall
             death
          
           ,
           the
           death
           of
           thy
           soule
           ,
           f
           
             the
             greatest
             of
             all
             euils
          
           that
           can
           possibly
           befall
           thee
           ,
           which
           by
           mature
           care
           and
           diligence
           now
           vsed
           ,
           may
           be
           preuented
           .
           But
           we
           are
           (
           as
           another
           well
           obserueth
           )
           herein
           ,
           the
           most
           of
           vs
           ,
           g
           like
           children
           ,
           that
           are
           h
           
             afraid
             of
             a
             visour
          
           ,
           but
           
             feare
             not
             the
             fire
             ;
             shreeke
          
           and
           start
           at
           the
           one
           ,
           but
           thrust
           their
           fingers
           into
           the
           other
           .
           *
           Wee
           
             feare
             the
             bodily
             death
          
           ,
           but
           not
           the
           
             spirituall
             death
          
           ,
           the
           
             death
             of
             the
             soule
          
           ,
           the
           
             death
             in
             sinne
          
           ,
           and
           
             dying
             in
             sinne
          
           ,
           without
           which
           the
           other
           cānot
           hurt
           .
           The
           feare
           of
           
             death
             troubleth
          
           and
           distracteth
           much
           our
           minds
           :
           but
           the
           feare
           of
           
             future
             matters
          
           ,
           that
           are
           
             truly
             fearfull
          
           indeed
           ,
           and
           but
           for
           which
           death
           needednot
           at
           al
           to
           be
           feared
           ,
           doth
           no
           more
           trouble
           or
           affect
           the
           most
           ,
           than
           as
           if
           
           no
           such
           thing
           were
           at
           all
           ,
           or
           they
           were
           i
           babes
           only
           that
           beleeued
           them
           .
        
         
           And
           thus
           much
           for
           the
           Generall
           ,
           that
           from
           this
           
             third
             Branch
          
           we
           obserue
           :
        
         
           Some
           Particulars
           follow
           ;
           which
           I
           will
           
             point
             at
          
           rather
           than
           
             insist
             on
          
           .
        
         
           More
           specially
           therefore
           we
           may
           hence
           further
           obserue
           ;
        
         
           First
           ,
           that
           in
           some
           cases
           
        
         
           
             To
             liue
             long
             is
             a
             blessing
             .
          
        
         
           It
           was
           foretold
           Abraham
           ,
           as
           a
           fauour
           ,
           that
           hee
           should
           k
           
             die
             an
             old
             man
          
           :
           and
           it
           is
           here
           recorded
           that
           so
           he
           did
           .
           And
           it
           was
           foretold
           Eli
           ,
           as
           an
           heauie
           iudgement
           that
           should
           betide
           his
           posterity
           ,
           that
           there
           should
           l
           
             neuer
             be
             any
             old
             man
             in
             his
             house
             .
             Long
             life
             ,
          
           as
           in
           the
           m
           Law
           it
           is
           promised
           oft
           as
           
             a
             blessing
          
           :
           and
           God
           where
           he
           describeth
           by
           the
           Prophet
           the
           flourishing
           estate
           of
           his
           people
           ,
           saith
           ,
           n
           
             There
             shall
             no
             more
             be
          
           ,
           o
           
             from
             them
          
           ,
           or
           
             goe
             thence
             ,
             an
             infant
             of
             daies
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           none
           of
           them
           shall
           die
           young
           or
           in
           infants
           estate
           ;
           
             nor
             any
             old
             man
             that
             hath
             not
             fulfilled
             his
             daies
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           p
           liued
           so
           long
           as
           in
           course
           of
           nature
           he
           well
           might
           :
           
             but
             the
             childe
             shall
             die
             an
             hundred
             yeares
             old
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           he
           that
           is
           now
           
             a
             childe
          
           shall
           liue
           till
           he
           be
           so
           many
           
             yeares
             old
          
           :
           (
           which
           place
           the
           rather
           I
           recite
           &
           open
           at
           large
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           some
           friuolous
           q
           crotchets
           that
           not
           a
           few
           haue
           fisht
           out
           of
           it
           ,
           cleane
           beside
           as
           well
           the
           meaning
           as
           the
           drift
           of
           
             Gods
             Spirit
             :
          
           )
           So
           the
           shortning
           of
           mans
           life
           is
           
           threatned
           oft
           as
           a
           curse
           .
           r
           
             Hee
             shall
             die
          
           s
           
             before
             his
             time
             ,
             as
             the
             greene
             grape
             is
             nipt
             off
             the
             Vine
             ,
             and
             the
             Oliue
             blossome
             shake
             off
             the
             tree
          
           ;
           saith
           Eliphaz
           of
           the
           wicked
           .
           And
           ,
           t
           
             Hee
             shall
             not
             liue
             out
             halfe
             his
             daies
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           u
           halfe
           the
           time
           that
           he
           might
           in
           the
           course
           of
           nature
           haue
           attained
           to
           ;
           saith
           the
           Psalmist
           of
           
             deceitfull
             and
             bloudie
             men
          
           .
        
         
           
             And
             well
             may
             it
             be
             so
             deemed
             .
          
        
         
           For
           first
           ,
           a
           
             Old
             age
             is
             honourable
          
           .
           Yea
           ,
           as
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           of
           b
           
             Mariage
             ,
             It
             is
             honourable
          
           c
           
             among
             all
             men
          
           .
           It
           is
           d
           a
           resemblance
           of
           
             Gods
             antiquitie
          
           ,
           who
           is
           called
           e
           
             the
             Ancient
             of
             daies
          
           .
           f
           
             The
             glory
             of
             young
             men
             is
             their
             strength
             :
          
           (
           saith
           
             Solomon
             )
             and
             the
             beauty
             of
             old
             men
             is
             the
             gray-head
             .
          
           And
           ,
           g
           
             Old
             age
          
           ,
           or
           
             the
             gray-head
             ,
             is
             a
             crowne
             of
             glory
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           h
           
             a
             glorious
             crowne
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             found
             in
             the
             way
             of
             righteousnesse
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           It
           is
           
             a
             blessing
          
           to
           liue
           to
           see
           posteritie
           ,
           especially
           to
           liue
           to
           see
           withall
           
             Gods
             blessing
          
           vpon
           it
           .
           i
           
             Blessed
             is
             the
             man
             that
             feareth
             God
          
           (
           saith
           the
           Psalmist
           )
           k
           For
           (
           among
           other
           things
           ,
           though
           it
           
           come
           last
           ,
           yet
           not
           the
           
             least
             )
             he
             shall
             liue
             to
             see
             his
             childrens
             children
             ,
          
           (
           that
           which
           is
           recorded
           also
           ,
           as
           a
           part
           of
           l
           
             Iobs
             happinesse
             )
             and
             peace
             upon
             Israel
             .
          
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           it
           is
           a
           matter
           of
           griefe
           to
           men
           *
           more
           than
           ordinary
           ,
           when
           friends
           are
           taken
           away
           from
           them
           by
           m
           
             immature
             death
          
           :
           when
           the
           ordinary
           course
           of
           nature
           is
           inuerted
           ,
           and
           they
           n
           burie
           ,
           those
           by
           whom
           they
           ought
           rather
           to
           haue
           beene
           buried
           .
        
         
           Fourthly
           ,
           it
           is
           a
           great
           grace
           to
           a
           godly
           man
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           doe
           God
           any
           
             good
             seruice
          
           .
           Such
           account
           it
           their
           greatest
           honour
           ,
           as
           o
           
             to
             suffer
             in
             Gods
             cause
          
           ,
           so
           
             to
             be
             employed
             in
             Gods
             worke
             .
          
           But
           the
           longer
           a
           man
           liueth
           ,
           the
           
             more
             glory
          
           may
           he
           bring
           to
           God
           ,
           the
           more
           seruice
           may
           hee
           doe
           to
           the
           Church
           and
           
             Children
             of
             God
          
           ,
           be
           he
           a
           publike
           person
           ,
           or
           a
           priuate
           ;
           not
           in
           regard
           of
           occasions
           and
           opportunities
           onely
           ,
           but
           in
           regard
           also
           of
           aptnesse
           and
           abilitie
           thereunto
           :
           Since
           that
           continua●ce
           of
           yeeres
           bring●th
           p
           wisdome
           and
           experience
           ;
           and
           antiquitie
           carrying
           a
           kinde
           of
           
           q
           authority
           with
           it
           ,
           procureth
           reuerence
           and
           respect
           :
           The
           former
           whereof
           fitteth
           men
           for
           the
           doing
           of
           the
           more
           good
           to
           others
           ,
           the
           latter
           others
           for
           the
           receiuing
           of
           the
           more
           good
           from
           them
           .
        
         
           
             Long
             life
          
           in
           these
           respects
           therefore
           may
           well
           be
           deemed
           
             a
             blessing
          
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           we
           may
           hence
           obserue
           ,
           that
           it
           is
        
         
           
             A
             great
             mercy
             of
             God
             to
             haue
             a
             good
             old
             age
             .
          
        
         
           It
           is
           a
           mercy
           more
           than
           ordinary
           for
           men
           at
           those
           yeeres
           to
           be
           kept
           free
           in
           some
           good
           measure
           ,
           though
           not
           from
           such
           weaknesse
           as
           the
           decay
           of
           nature
           necessarily
           importeth
           ,
           yet
           from
           such
           aches
           ,
           and
           paines
           ,
           and
           grieuances
           ,
           and
           diseases
           ,
           and
           annoiances
           ,
           as
           that
           age
           is
           wont
           commonly
           to
           be
           annoied
           and
           pestered
           with
           .
        
         
           For
           first
           ,
           r
           Health
           and
           the
           enioyment
           of
           it
           ,
           is
           at
           all
           times
           
             a
             great
             mercy
          
           ;
           (
           s
           no
           outward
           thing
           being
           comfortable
           or
           delightfull
           without
           it
           )
           that
           which
           nothing
           sheweth
           so
           well
           as
           t
           the
           want
           of
           it
           at
           some
           times
           ,
           and
           the
           inconueniences
           that
           ensue
           thereupon
           .
           And
           if
           to
           enioy
           it
           at
           any
           time
           then
           be
           
             no
             small
             benefit
          
           ,
           euen
           at
           such
           times
           wherein
           others
           are
           wont
           vsually
           to
           enioy
           it
           :
           how
           much
           more
           is
           it
           
             a
             great
             mercie
          
           
           to
           haue
           it
           at
           that
           age
           ,
           wherein
           most
           men
           are
           wont
           to
           finde
           a
           much
           more
           than
           vsuall
           want
           of
           it
           ?
           The
           more
           infectious
           the
           times
           and
           places
           are
           that
           we
           liue
           and
           abide
           in
           ,
           the
           greater
           goodnesse
           of
           God
           it
           is
           to
           vs
           ,
           if
           we
           keepe
           free
           from
           infection
           :
           So
           the●ore
           u
           
             old
             age
          
           is
           subiect
           to
           diseases
           and
           disasters
           ,
           the
           greater
           mercy
           it
           is
           for
           old
           men
           to
           be
           kept
           free
           then
           from
           either
           .
        
         
           Againe
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           so
           much
           the
           bare
           decay
           of
           nature
           or
           ab●tement
           of
           bodily
           strength
           ,
           as
           either
           maketh
           
             old
             age
          
           so
           x
           cumbersome
           &
           burdensome
           to
           men
           ,
           and
           depriueth
           them
           of
           all
           alacrity
           and
           cheerefulnesse
           of
           spirit
           ;
           (
           you
           shall
           see
           
             old
             men
          
           ,
           though
           so
           weake
           and
           feeble
           ,
           that
           they
           can
           scarce
           stir
           from
           the
           place
           where
           they
           are
           set
           ,
           yet
           as
           y
           cheerefull
           and
           frolicke
           ,
           as
           we
           say
           ,
           and
           as
           heartie
           ,
           yea
           much
           more
           lightsome
           many
           times
           ,
           than
           many
           farre
           younger
           than
           themselues
           )
           or
           that
           disableth
           them
           to
           doing
           good
           ,
           and
           to
           the
           performance
           of
           good
           offices
           for
           the
           behoofe
           and
           benefit
           of
           others
           :
           (
           For
           such
           albeit
           their
           bodily
           strength
           be
           most
           past
           ,
           yet
           their
           z
           wits
           may
           
           be
           still
           fresh
           :
           and
           though
           they
           cannot
           afford
           much
           helpe
           of
           the
           hand
           ,
           yet
           a
           by
           sage
           counsell
           and
           graue
           aduice
           ,
           they
           may
           further
           affaires
           more
           either
           publike
           or
           priuate
           ,
           b
           than
           many
           younger
           and
           stronger
           are
           able●●doe
           with
           their
           hands
           :
           *
           
             a
             few
             gray
             haires
          
           ,
           saith
           on●
           ;
           may
           be
           more
           worth
           ,
           than
           
             many
             young
             lockes
          
           ;
           and
           a
           few
           
             gray
             beards
          
           doe
           more
           than
           many
           
             greene
             heads
          
           .
           It
           is
           not
           that
           decay
           of
           nature
           or
           bodily
           strength
           so
           much
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           as
           such
           c
           paines
           and
           diseases
           as
           vsually
           accompany
           
             old
             age
          
           ,
           that
           are
           wont
           to
           make
           it
           to
           be
           either
           so
           tedious
           to
           them
           themselues
           ,
           that
           they
           grow
           d
           weary
           oft
           euen
           of
           their
           liues
           ,
           or
           that
           ma●eth
           them
           so
           unprofitable
           to
           others
           ,
           yea
           and
           oft
           so
           f
           burdensome
           too
           ,
           that
           they
           grow
           as
           weary
           of
           them
           ,
           as
           they
           are
           themselues
           of
           their
           liues
           .
           Which
           to
           be
           freed
           therefore
           from
           ,
           either
           for
           the
           most
           part
           ,
           or
           in
           some
           good
           measure
           ,
           in
           that
           age
           ,
           must
           needs
           bee
           counted
           no
           small
           merey
           .
        
         
           Thirdly
           ,
           obserue
           wee
           hence
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           a
           kinde
           of
        
         
           
             Satietie
             and
             fulnesse
             of
             life
          
           :
        
         
           not
           so
           much
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           an
           g
           irkesomnesse
           ,
           and
           tediousnesse
           ,
           e
           
           as
           h
           a
           satietie
           and
           fulnesse
           ;
           when
           a
           man
           ,
           though
           not
           weary
           of
           a
           thing
           ,
           yet
           he
           hath
           his
           i
           fill
           ,
           so
           much
           as
           he
           desireth
           ,
           of
           it
           ;
           to
           the
           godly
           especially
           ;
           for
           I
           finde
           not
           the
           phrase
           vsed
           in
           the
           word
           but
           of
           them
           onely
           ;
           as
           of
           Abraham
           here
           ,
           of
           k
           Isaak
           ,
           of
           l
           Iob
           ,
           of
           m
           Iehoiada
           ,
           of
           n
           Dauid
           ,
           of
           whom
           it
           is
           said
           also
           ,
           that
           he
           died
           o
           
             with
             a
             good
             gray
             head
             ,
             full
             of
             daies
             and
             riches
             ,
             and
             honour
             .
          
        
         
           Now
           this
           satietie
           and
           fulnesse
           of
           life
           commonly
           befalleth
           such
           ;
        
         
           First
           ,
           when
           some
           speciall
           promises
           of
           God
           haue
           beene
           
             made
             good
          
           to
           them
           ,
           or
           some
           speciall
           p
           blessings
           of
           
             God
             enioyed
          
           by
           them
           ,
           correspondent
           to
           their
           owne
           desires
           .
           So
           Simeon
           ,
           when
           he
           had
           liued
           so
           long
           (
           q
           which
           it
           was
           foretold
           him
           he
           should
           doe
           )
           as
           to
           
             see
             our
             Sauiour
          
           in
           the
           flesh
           ,
           he
           hath
           euen
           enough
           of
           this
           life
           ,
           he
           desireth
           not
           now
           to
           liue
           an
           houre
           longer
           .
           r
           Lord
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             now
             lettest
             thou
             thy
             seruant
             depart
             in
             peace
             ;
             since
             that
             mine
             eyes
             haue
             once
             seene
             thy
             saluation
             ,
          
           my
           Sauiour
           ,
           and
           the
           Sauiour
           of
           all
           mankind
           .
           So
           Iacob
           ,
           when
           he
           saw
           his
           sonne
           Ioseph
           againe
           ,
           whom
           he
           had
           s
           giuen
           vp
           for
           dead
           and
           gone
           long
           agoe
           ,
           not
           aliue
           only
           ,
           but
           in
           honour
           ,
           and
           not
           him
           alone
           ,
           but
           his
           issue
           too
           ;
           t
           
             Let
             me
             now
             die
          
           ;
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             I
             haue
             liued
             long
             enough
             ;
             I
             desire
             life
             now
             no
             longer
             ;
             since
             I
             haue
             seene
             thy
             face
             ,
             and
             that
             thou
             art
             yet
             aliue
             .
             For
          
           u
           
             I
             made
             full
             account
             neuer
             to
             haue
             seene
             thy
             face
             ;
             and
             behold
             God
             hath
             made
             me
             see
             thy
             seed
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           where
           their
           a
           employments
           here
           are
           at
           a
           
             full
             point
          
           ,
           at
           a
           period
           ;
           when
           they
           haue
           done
           their
           taske
           that
           God
           had
           assigned
           them
           ,
           and
           there
           
           b
           seemeth
           to
           be
           now
           here
           no
           further
           work
           for
           them
           .
           c
           Dauid
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             when
             he
             had
             serued
             his
             set
             time
             by
             God
             assigned
             him
             ,
             slept
             .
          
           And
           the
           Apostle
           Paul
           ,
           as
           d
           he
           was
           content
           
             to
             stay
             longer
             in
             the
             flesh
             for
             the
             good
             of
             the
             Philippians
             ,
          
           and
           the
           furtherance
           of
           their
           faith
           ,
           then
           he
           desired
           otherwise
           to
           doe
           :
           so
           hee
           saith
           on
           the
           other
           side
           ,
           that
           e
           
             his
             life
             was
             not
             deare
             to
             him
             ,
          
           he
           cared
           not
           how
           soone
           he
           laid
           it
           downe
           ,
           if
           so
           be
           that
           he
           had
           fulfilled
           but
           
             the
             course
             of
             his
             ministery
          
           ,
           and
           that
           his
           worke
           it
           were
           once
           
             at
             an
             end
          
           .
        
         
           The
           Vse
           of
           which
           seuerall
           Points
           in
           a
           word
           ,
           may
           be
           ,
        
         
           First
           of
           the
           two
           former
           ,
           to
           admonish
           
             old
             men
          
           ,
           and
           such
           more
           specially
           as
           through
           the
           goodnesse
           of
           
           God
           enioy
           a
           commodious
           and
           
             comfortable
             time
          
           of
           it
           ,
           free
           from
           many
           such
           griefes
           as
           they
           heare
           others
           of
           their
           yeares
           oft
           complaine
           of
           ,
           to
           acknowledge
           Gods
           great
           mercy
           and
           goodnesse
           to
           them
           therein
           ;
           as
           f
           in
           lengthening
           out
           their
           life
           ,
           and
           satisfying
           them
           with
           a
           greater
           
             number
             of
             daies
          
           then
           others
           ordinarily
           attaine
           vnto
           ,
           by
           means
           whereof
           they
           may
           liue
           to
           see
           those
           brought
           vp
           vnder
           them
           ,
           and
           bestowed
           by
           them
           ,
           that
           are
           of
           their
           charge
           ,
           and
           whom
           God
           hath
           here
           blessed
           them
           with
           :
           so
           g
           in
           freeing
           of
           them
           from
           such
           annoiances
           ,
           as
           are
           vsually
           attendants
           of
           that
           age
           ,
           and
           which
           might
           make
           their
           continuance
           here
           the
           more
           tedious
           and
           vncomfortable
           to
           them
           :
           And
           h
           to
           apply
           themselues
           therefore
           to
           such
           holy
           and
           
             religious
             Employments
          
           ,
           so
           farre
           forth
           as
           their
           present
           estate
           and
           condition
           shall
           permit
           ,
           whereby
           they
           may
           bring
           glory
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           doe
           some
           seruice
           to
           him
           ,
           who
           is
           so
           good
           and
           gratious
           to
           them
           aboue
           
           many
           others
           in
           that
           kinde
           :
           Remembring
           withall
           ,
           that
           howsoeuer
           i
           
             old
             age
          
           of
           it selfe
           be
           
             an
             honour
          
           ;
           yet
           it
           is
           nothing
           lesse
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           not
           k
           
             found
             in
             the
             way
             of
             righteousnesse
             ,
          
           as
           the
           wise
           man
           speaketh
           ,
           if
           it
           be
           not
           religiously
           imployed
           :
           And
           that
           ,
           howsoeuer
           to
           the
           
             godly
             long
             life
          
           may
           be
           
             a
             blessing
          
           ,
           yet
           l
           
             the
             wicked
             man
          
           ,
           (
           saith
           the
           Prophet
           )
           
             though
             he
             liue
             an
             hundred
             yeeres
             ,
             shall
             be
             but
             an
             accursed
             wretch
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           the
           vse
           of
           the
           last
           of
           these
           points
           may
           be
           to
           shew
           
             a
             difference
          
           betweene
           godly
           and
           worldly
           men
           .
           The
           godly
           haue
           oft
           euen
           a
           satietie
           of
           life
           :
           m
           As
           willing
           they
           are
           
             to
             leaue
             the
             world
          
           ,
           as
           men
           are
           wont
           to
           be
           
             to
             rise
             from
             the
             bord
          
           ,
           when
           they
           haue
           eaten
           their
           fill
           ,
           or
           so
           much
           as
           they
           desire
           .
           But
           with
           worldly
           men
           for
           the
           most
           part
           it
           is
           farre
           otherwise
           :
           they
           haue
           
             neuer
             enough
          
           ,
           as
           of
           n
           the
           wealth
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           so
           of
           o
           this
           present
           life
           :
           by
           their
           good
           will
           they
           would
           
             neuer
             die
          
           .
           It
           is
           true
           indeed
           ,
           that
           sometime
           ,
           either
           crosses
           and
           calamities
           ,
           extraordinarie
           disasters
           ,
           or
           sore
           torturing
           paines
           and
           long
           lingring
           diseases
           ,
           out
           of
           a
           kinde
           of
           impatiencie
           ,
           may
           make
           them
           p
           weary
           of
           their
           liues
           and
           q
           desirous
           of
           
           death
           ,
           which
           but
           for
           those
           grieua●ces
           and
           a●●oia●ces
           they
           would
           else
           be
           farre
           from
           :
           Whereas
           the
           godly
           ,
           with
           Abraham
           &
           Dauid
           ,
           euen
           then
           also
           ,
           r
           when
           they
           haue
           a
           good
           and
           a
           comfortable
           continuance
           of
           life
           ,
           accompanied
           and
           attended
           as
           well
           with
           health
           of
           body
           ,
           as
           with
           s
           honour
           and
           wealth
           ,
           yet
           haue
           their
           fill
           of
           it
           ,
           and
           are
           as
           well
           willing
           to
           leaue
           it
           ,
           as
           the
           other
           are
           some
           dish
           of
           meat
           that
           they
           haue
           eaten
           their
           fill
           of
           .
           Yea
           t
           so
           fondly
           are
           worldly
           men
           herein
           oft
           affected
           ,
           and
           their
           hearts
           so
           possessed
           with
           the
           loue
           of
           this
           life
           ,
           that
           though
           
             they
             know
             not
             how
             to
             liue
             ,
          
           yet
           
             they
             are
             not
             willing
             to
             die
          
           ;
           though
           their
           life
           be
           so
           irkesome
           and
           painfull
           unto
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           seeme
           to
           be
           u
           
             long
             a
             dying
          
           rather
           than
           to
           
             liue
             long
          
           ,
           and
           x
           the
           
             delay
             of
             death
          
           farre
           worse
           with
           them
           ,
           
             than
             death
          
           it selfe
           could
           be
           to
           them
           ,
           yet
           they
           desire
           y
           to
           endure
           rather
           any
           extremitie
           of
           griefe
           and
           torture
           with
           life
           ,
           than
           to
           haue
           an
           end
           put
           to
           their
           paines
           and
           torments
           by
           death
           .
        
         
           But
           let
           vs
           rather
           herein
           striue
           to
           be
           affected
           as
           
             Gods
             Saints
          
           are
           ,
           especially
           when
           it
           hathpleased
           God
           
           to
           blesse
           vs
           with
           long
           life
           ,
           with
           many
           yeeres
           more
           ,
           than
           the
           greater
           number
           of
           folke
           are
           wont
           to
           attaine
           to
           ;
           *
           labour
           to
           finde
           and
           feele
           in
           our selues
           this
           satiety
           and
           fulnesse
           of
           life
           ;
           and
           be
           willing
           and
           content
           to
           leaue
           it
           ,
           when
           God
           shall
           please
           to
           call
           for
           it
           ,
           though
           no
           speciall
           affliction
           or
           paine
           enforce
           thereunto
           ,
           not
           z
           as
           
             a
             meat
             loathed
          
           ,
           (
           which
           the
           naturall
           man
           oft
           doth
           )
           but
           as
           
             〈◊〉
             dish
          
           ,
           though
           well
           liked
           ,
           that
           we
           haue
           fed
           our
           fill
           of
           .
        
         
           And
           hitherto
           also
           of
           the
           
             third
             Particular
          
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           
             time
             when
          
           he
           died
           .
        
         
           The
           fourth
           and
           last
           followeth
           ,
           and
           that
           is
           whither
           hee
           went
           when
           hee
           died
           ;
           whereof
           the
           Text
           saith
           here
           ,
           that
        
         
           
             He
             was
             gathered
             to
             his
             people
          
           ;
           and
           in
           another
           place
           of
           him
           ,
           that
        
         
           a
           
             He
             went
             to
             his
             Fathers
          
           .
        
         
           And
           there
           is
           nothing
           more
           frequent
           and
           common
           in
           Scripture
           than
           these
           and
           the
           like
           phrases
           vsed
           of
           persons
           deceassing
           ,
           that
           b
           
             they
             sleepe
             with
          
           ,
           c
           
             they
             goe
             to
          
           ,
           d
           
             they
             are
             gathered
             vnto
          
           ,
           either
           
             their
             people
          
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           their
           countrimen
           ,
           or
           
             their
             ancestors
          
           ,
           for
           that
           is
           ,
           e
           
             their
             Fathers
          
           .
           So
           that
           ,
        
         
           
             Men
             ,
             when
             they
             die
             ,
             they
             goe
             to
             their
             people
             ,
             to
             their
             〈◊〉
             Fathers
             .
          
        
         
           That
           which
           may
           well
           be
           vnderstood
           
             two
             waies
          
           ;
           and
           the
           
             Holy
             Ghost
          
           might
           well
           therin
           aime
           at
           both
           ,
           because
           both
           goe
           vnder
           
             one
             generall
          
           ,
           and
           the
           phrase
           as
           it
           may
           
             fit
             either
          
           ,
           so
           f
           it
           may
           well
           
             include
             both
          
           .
        
         
         
         
         
         
         
           First
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           body
           :
           because
           g
           
             it
             returneth
             to
             the
             earth
          
           ,
           the
           common
           h
           receptacle
           of
           all
           .
           As
           
           it
           is
           said
           of
           Dauid
           ,
           that
           i
           
             he
             was
             laid
             vnto
          
           ,
           or
           
             laid
             vp
             ,
             with
             his
             Fathers
             .
          
           For
           howsoeuer
           of
           Abraham
           it
           k
           seeme
           to
           some
           ,
           that
           it
           cannot
           be
           so
           meant
           ,
           because
           l
           his
           corpes
           was
           enterred
           in
           the
           Land
           of
           Canaan
           ,
           (
           m
           so
           generally
           termed
           )
           in
           a
           strange
           countrey
           ,
           where
           his
           countrey-men
           in
           likelihood
           none
           of
           them
           lay
           :
           yet
           it
           followeth
           not
           thence
           ,
           that
           it
           may
           not
           euen
           in
           that
           sense
           also
           be
           said
           of
           him
           too
           :
           since
           that
           the
           graue
           in
           generall
           ,
           n
           not
           the
           artificiall
           one
           ,
           but
           the
           o
           naturall
           ,
           (
           which
           p
           the
           Hebrewes
           also
           well
           distinguish
           )
           is
           (
           as
           Iob
           fitly
           termeth
           it
           )
           q
           
             the
             Congregation
             house
             of
             all
             liuing
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           place
           wherein
           they
           
             all
             meet
          
           together
           after
           decease
           ,
           be
           the
           places
           of
           their
           sepulture
           neuer
           so
           farre
           asunder
           ;
           yea
           whether
           they
           haue
           any
           sepulture
           or
           no
           ,
           as
           Iacob
           supposed
           that
           Ioseph
           had
           not
           ,
           whom
           hee
           yet
           saith
           ,
           hee
           would
           
             die
             ,
             and
          
           r
           
             goe
             downe
             to
             ,
             to
             the
             graue
             .
          
           And
           
           as
           well
           might
           Abraham
           ,
           for
           his
           body
           also
           ,
           be
           said
           ,
           to
           be
           
             gathered
             to
             his
             people
          
           ,
           though
           hee
           were
           buried
           in
           some
           other
           place
           then
           the
           most
           of
           them
           were
           ,
           as
           Jacob
           might
           be
           said
           to
           
             goe
             to
             Ioseph
          
           ,
           because
           s
           he
           was
           to
           be
           
             laid
             in
             the
             ground
          
           when
           he
           died
           ,
           Ioseph
           being
           ,
           as
           he
           supposed
           ,
           t
           buried
           in
           the
           bowels
           of
           some
           beast
           :
           since
           that
           ,
           as
           Solomon
           saith
           ,
           u
           
             all
             goe
             to
             one
             common
             place
             ;
             all
             returne
             againe
             to
             their
             dust
             .
          
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           Soule
           .
        
         
           First
           a
           in
           Generall
           :
           because
           it
           departeth
           hence
           indefinitely
           into
           
             another
             world
          
           ,
           not
           proper
           and
           peculiar
           ,
           as
           he
           said
           b
           each
           one
           did
           when
           hee
           slept
           ,
           but
           c
           common
           and
           generall
           :
           it
           goeth
           hence
           to
           the
           d
           
             vnseene
             world
          
           ,
           as
           the
           Heathens
           termed
           it
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           e
           
             world
             of
             Soules
          
           ,
           as
           the
           
             Hebrew
             Doctors
          
           call
           it
           ;
           to
           that
           
             other
             world
          
           ,
           (
           including
           both
           Heauen
           and
           Hell
           )
           in
           generall
           ,
           that
           is
           
             the
             Congregation
             House
             of
             Soules
          
           ,
           as
           the
           Graue
           is
           of
           Corpses
           :
           As
           f
           the
           supposed
           Samuel
           told
           Saul
           ,
           (
           though
           he
           meant
           not
           ,
           nor
           intended
           it
           so
           to
           be
           taken
           ,
           that
           Saul
           should
           be
           in
           the
           same
           
             speciall
             state
          
           or
           place
           that
           Samuel
           was
           then
           in
           ,
           when
           he
           died
           )
           g
           
             To
             morrow
             shalt
             thou
             be
             with
             me
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           in
           the
           
             other
             world
          
           ,
           wherein
           both
           thou
           and
           I
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           good
           and
           bad
           are
           after
           decease
           .
        
         
           Secondly
           ,
           more
           specially
           ;
           the
           Soules
           of
           
             Gods
             Saints
             and
             seruants
          
           may
           well
           be
           said
           
             to
             go
             to
             their
             people
          
           
           
           
             and
             their
             Fathers
          
           ,
           when
           they
           die
           ;
           h
           because
           they
           goe
           to
           that
           
             peculiar
             place
          
           ,
           where
           all
           their
           
             godly
             Country-men
          
           and
           Ancestors
           are
           ;
           to
           the
           i
           
             Congregation
             house
          
           (
           as
           the
           Apostle
           termes
           it
           )
           
             of
             the
             First-borne
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Spirits
             of
             the
             Iust.
          
           Nor
           doth
           it
           hinder
           ,
           but
           that
           of
           Abraham
           it
           may
           so
           also
           be
           vnderstood
           ,
           albeit
           that
           both
           his
           Country-mē
           ,
           the
           most
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           his
           Ancestours
           also
           ,
           many
           of
           them
           ,
           might
           be
           idolaters
           ,
           as
           k
           himselfe
           also
           at
           first
           was
           ;
           since
           that
           many
           yet
           no
           doubt
           of
           both
           those
           rankes
           ,
           both
           were
           pious
           ,
           while
           they
           liued
           ,
           and
           
             went
             to
             God
          
           ,
           when
           they
           died
           :
           Besides
           that
           ,
           wel
           also
           may
           they
           all
           be
           termed
           and
           stiled
           l
           his
           people
           ,
           or
           country-men
           ,
           though
           little
           of
           kinne
           to
           him
           otherwise
           ,
           that
           were
           the
           people
           ,
           while
           they
           liued
           ,
           of
           the
           same
           God
           that
           he
           serued
           :
           Yea
           as
           well
           might
           m
           all
           the
           faithfull
           that
           went
           before
           him
           ,
           be
           termed
           
             his
             Fathers
          
           ,
           whether
           he
           were
           lineally
           and
           carnally
           descended
           of
           them
           or
           no
           ,
           as
           n
           all
           the
           faithfull
           that
           came
           after
           him
           ,
           are
           termed
           
             his
             sonnes
          
           .
        
         
           
             But
             to
             hasten
             to
             an
             end
             :
          
        
         
           First
           ,
           this
           may
           serue
           to
           
             strengthen
             vs
          
           against
           the
           feare
           of
           death
           ,
           or
           of
           what
           shall
           become
           of
           vs
           when
           we
           are
           dead
           :
           Since
           that
           ,
           as
           a
           we
           
             goe
             not
          
           any
           
             strange
             way
          
           when
           we
           die
           ,
           such
           as
           none
           haue
           gone
           before
           vs
           ,
           but
           a
           
             beaten
             path
          
           ,
           that
           b
           all
           ,
           euen
           good
           ,
           haue
           gone
           ;
           so
           we
           
             goe
             not
          
           to
           any
           
             strange
             place
          
           ,
           where
           either
           none
           are
           already
           ,
           or
           none
           that
           we
           haue
           any
           acquaintance
           withall
           ;
           but
           we
           goe
           to
           our
           
             Christian
             friends
          
           ,
           to
           our
           
             religious
             Fore-fathers
          
           ,
           c
           to
           a
           place
           ,
           where
           we
           shall
           
           meet
           againe
           with
           all
           those
           ,
           that
           wee
           d
           sent
           from
           hence
           before
           vs
           ,
           hauing
           
             deceased
             in
             the
             faith
          
           .
           It
           is
           that
           indeed
           that
           much
           troubleth
           men
           and
           women
           many
           times
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           enforced
           to
           trauell
           into
           strange
           countries
           ,
           and
           to
           change
           the
           places
           of
           their
           wonted
           and
           ancient
           abode
           ;
           to
           fore-thinke
           ,
           what
           an
           vncouth
           thing
           it
           wil
           be
           ,
           to
           come
           among
           
             a
             strange
             people
          
           ,
           where
           they
           
             know
             none
          
           ,
           and
           
             none
             know
          
           them
           .
           It
           would
           haue
           troubled
           Iacob
           not
           a
           little
           to
           haue
           remoued
           into
           Aegypt
           ,
           had
           he
           not
           beene
           *
           sure
           to
           finde
           Ioseph
           there
           .
           But
           the
           godly
           need
           not
           be
           troubled
           with
           any
           such
           thoughts
           ,
           when
           they
           are
           to
           remoue
           hence
           :
           For
           they
           shall
           goe
           to
           
             their
             owne
             people
             ,
             their
             Friends
             ,
             their
             Fathers
             :
          
           they
           shall
           be
           sure
           to
           e
           finde
           
             country-men
             ,
             kindred
             ,
             acquaintance
          
           enough
           in
           heauen
           ,
           that
           will
           be
           f
           readie
           to
           receiue
           them
           ,
           to
           welcome
           them
           thither
           ,
           to
           giue
           them
           the
           
             best
             entertainment
          
           that
           can
           be
           there
           .
           Yea
           this
           should
           make
           vs
           the
           rather
           
             desirous
             to
             die
          
           and
           to
           go
           hence
           ,
           g
           that
           we
           may
           goe
           to
           ,
           and
           be
           with
           those
           worthies
           ,
           whom
           either
           hauing
           knowne
           here
           our selues
           ,
           or
           hauing
           read
           of
           ,
           or
           heard
           report
           of
           from
           others
           ,
           we
           haue
           admired
           ,
           and
           desired
           either
           to
           see
           ,
           or
           to
           
             liue
             with
          
           ,
           while
           they
           liued
           here
           .
        
         
           And
           lastly
           ,
           if
           we
           desire
           to
           goe
           to
           them
           when
           we
           die
           ,
           let
           vs
           be
           sure
           to
           follow
           them
           while
           we
           liue
           .
           h
           Adioine
           thy selfe
           to
           them
           ,
           associate
           thy selfe
           with
           them
           ,
           while
           thou
           
             liuest
             here
          
           ,
           if
           thou
           desirest
           to
           
             be
             with
          
           them
           ,
           and
           to
           partake
           with
           them
           ,
           when
           thou
           
             departest
             hence
          
           .
           i
           Walke
           thou
           must
           
             in
             the
             steps
             of
             faithfull
             Abraham
             ,
          
           while
           thou
           liuest
           ,
           if
           thou
           lookest
           to
           haue
           a
           place
           k
           
             in
             Abrahams
             bosome
          
           ,
           when
           thou
           
           diest
           ,
           and
           l
           
             sit
             downe
             with
             him
          
           ,
           after
           this
           life
           ,
           
             in
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             .
             Oh
          
           (
           it
           may
           be
           that
           some
           of
           you
           will
           s●y
           of
           this
           our
           blessed
           Brother
           now
           deceased
           )
           
             that
             my
             soule
             were
             where
             his
             is
             :
             that
             I
             might
             be
             sure
             to
             die
             as
             he
             did
             ,
             and
             to
             goe
             whither
             he
             is
             gone
             ,
             when
             I
             die
             .
          
           Heare
           what
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ;
           he
           pointeth
           thee
           the
           way
           ,
           he
           telleth
           thee
           how
           it
           may
           so
           be
           ,
           how
           thou
           maist
           haue
           thy
           desire
           .
           m
           
             Think
             vpon
             those
          
           (
           saith
           he
           )
           
             that
             haue
             had
             the
             ouersight
             of
             you
             ,
             and
             that
             haue
             declared
             the
             word
             of
             God
             vnto
             you
             ;
             and
             follow
             their
             faith
             ,
             considering
             what
             the
             end
             of
             their
             life
             hath
             beene
             .
          
           Be
           not
           like
           Balaam
           ,
           n
           that
           wished
           to
           come
           where
           the
           godly
           were
           ,
           but
           o
           had
           no
           minde
           to
           goe
           the
           way
           that
           they
           went.
           But
           p
           follow
           the
           rules
           that
           he
           taught
           thee
           ,
           q
           goe
           the
           way
           that
           he
           led
           thee
           ,
           by
           life
           as
           well
           as
           by
           lesson
           ,
           while
           he
           liued
           ;
           and
           then
           shalt
           thou
           be
           sure
           to
           
             go
             to
             him
          
           when
           thou
           diest
           ,
           and
           to
           
             enioy
             there
             with
             him
          
           and
           other
           the
           faithfull
           gone
           before
           thee
           ,
           those
           ioyes
           and
           that
           blisse
           ,
           that
           with
           God
           and
           Christ
           they
           are
           there
           fully
           possessed
           of
           alreadie
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           Faults
           escaped
           .
        
         
           PAge
           18.
           line
           21.
           reade
           walked
           .
           p.
           32.
           l.
           11.
           r.
           stranger
           .
           p.
           27.
           l.
           2.
           r.
           
             with
             wind
          
           .
           p.
           28.
           l.
           18.
           r.
           
             hardly
             he
             discerned
          
           .
        
         
           
             In
             the
             Margine
          
           .
        
         
           PAge
           20.
           l.
           a
           peritat
           .
           p.
           22.
           l.
           d
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           23.
           l.
           s
           
             seu
             quod
          
           .
           p.
           25.
           l.
           k
           
             sicut
             cum
          
           .
           p.
           26.
           l.
           c
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           l.
           i
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           27.
           l.
           a
           dissip●●
           .
           p.
           28.
           l.
           l
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
           p.
           29.
           l.
           a
           
             sap●rque
             &c.
             &
             ibid.
             famil
             .
             a●rae
             .
          
           p.
           30.
           l.
           ●
           caet●rorum
           .
           p.
           32.
           l.
           p
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           
             &
             ibid.
          
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           .
        
         
           
             Adde
             p.
             49.
             l.
             9.
             after
             ,
             haue
             beene
             buried
             .
          
        
         
           In
           regard
           whereof
           that
           *
           great
           King
           sometime
           ,
           though
           then
           none
           ,
           preferred
           †
           peace
           before
           warre
           ;
           for
           that
           “
           in
           time
           of
           peace
           vsually
           
             Children
             burie
          
           their
           Parents
           ,
           whereas
           in
           time
           of
           
             warre
             Parents
          
           are
           wont
           to
           bury
           their
           Children
           .
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A01523-e110
           
             a
             Diligentia
             subdium
             .
             Cicero
             pro
             Quinct
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             c
             Pictores
             pulchrā
             absolutamque
             faciem
             rarò
             nisi
             in
             peius
             effingunt
             .
             Plin.
             Sec.
             lib.
             5.
             epist.
             10.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             in
             Basil.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Sol
             &
             Seutum
             .
             Psal.
             84.
             12.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A01523-e1190
           
             a
             Christianor
             〈…〉
             corpora
             Christi
             membra
             ,
             Dei
             templa
             .
             Tertul.
             de
             resurr
             .
             carn
             .
          
           
             b
             1
             Cor.
             6.
             15.
             
          
           
             c
             1
             Cor.
             6.
             19.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Dormitoria
             .
             Vide
             Durant
             .
             de
             ritib.
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             23.
             
          
           
             e
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Cubilia
             .
             Esai
             .
             57.
             2.
             
          
           
             f
             1
             Cor.
             12.
             4
             ,
             6
             ,
             11.
             
          
           
             g
             2
             Cor.
             12
             ,
             27.
             30.
             
          
           
             h
             1
             Sam.
             25.
             1.
             
          
           
             i
             〈◊〉
             Sam.
             3.
             20.
             
          
           
             k
             1
             Sam.
             7.
             15
             ,
             16.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Resiquiae
             .
             Hinc
             I●l
             .
             Scaligeri
             epit●ph
             .
             Scaligeri
             quod
             reliquum
             esi
             .
          
           
             m
             Test●s
             oculatus
             :
             qu
             〈…〉
             auritis
             d
             〈…〉
             m
             praefer
             Plaut
             .
             Trucul
             .
             2.
             6.
             quos
             sccundae
             notae
             testes
             appellat
             .
             Sen.
             quaest
             .
             n●t
             .
             l.
             4.
             c.
             3.
             
             Nam
             &
             serur
             〈…〉
             &
             sia●er●us
             visa
             solent
             ,
             quam
             audita
             narrari
             ,
             &
             in
             tertium
             nas
             transf●sa
             facilius
             coaces●unt
             .
             Goff●id
             .
             vit
             Be●n
             .
             l.
             1.
             prae●●t
             .
             contra
             quam
             Apuleius
             :
             cui
             Florid
             .
             1.
             
             Pluris
             est
             .
             au
             〈…〉
             us
             t●s●is
             uni●
             ,
             quam
             ocula●
             de●e
             .
          
           
             n
             Theologiae
             anc●llari
             .
          
           
             o
             Pietatem
             huma●ita●i
             intercalarem
             facere
             .
          
           
             p
             Tanquam
             subtemen
             &
             stamen
             .
          
           
             q
             Hebr.
             10.
             24.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Quod
             ex
             Prou.
             27.
             17.
             tractum
             vid●tur
             .
          
           
             s
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             in
             B●sil
             .
          
           
             t
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             u
             ●uk
             〈◊〉
             16
             
          
           
             a
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             b
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             c
             〈◊〉
             Cor.
             〈◊〉
             .
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             d
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             e
             〈◊〉
             Co●
             .
             9.
             
             〈◊〉
             ,
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             g
             2
             Cor.
             13.
             3.
             
          
           
             h
             1
             Cor.
             3.
             6
             ,
             7.
             
          
           
             i
             Iacob
             .
             de
             Vorag
             .
             in
             A●dr
             .
             s●rm
             4.
             
          
           
             k
             Pis●atores
             praedicatores
             primitiu●
             ,
             Matth.
             4.
             19.
             qu●
             vno
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             multitud
             〈…〉
             capiunt
             ,
             ●uc
             .
             5.
             6.
             
             Ioan.
             21.
             6.
             
             Act.
             2.
             41.
             
             &
             4.
             4.
             
          
           
             l
             Praedicatores
             moderni
             vt
             venatores
             ,
             Ier
             9.
             16.
             qui
             cu●
             clamo●ibus
             &
             laboribus
             multis
             vix
             vnam
             feram
             capi
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             m
             Es●●
             .
             53.
             1.
             
          
           
             n
             Es●i
             .
             49
             4
             
          
           
             o
             Esai
             .
             8.
             18.
             
          
           
             p
             〈◊〉
             Cor.
             4.
             15.
             
          
           
             q
             Iam.
             〈◊〉
             ●0
             .
          
           
             r
             Matth.
             16.
             26.
             
          
           
             s
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Plut.
             de
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈…〉
             ct
             .
             cum
             princip
             .
          
           
             t
             Dan
             12.
             3.
             
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             Iun.
             
          
           
             x
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             iustifi
             〈…〉
             .
             Ian.
             ad
             〈◊〉
             cōuertentes
             .
             Geneu
             .
             &
             Reg.
             Bibl.
             Angl.
             
          
           
             y
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             z
             Matth.
             13.
             43.
             
          
           
             a
             〈◊〉
             .
             1.
             16.
             
          
           
             b
             〈◊〉
             18.
             6.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             19.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             Thess.
             3.
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             Rom
             10.
             1.
             1
             
             Cor.
             9.
             19.
             22.
             
             &
             10.
             33.
             
          
           
             d
             Psal.
             58.
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             Ier.
             6.
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             ●8
             .
             ●9
             .
             30.
             
          
           
             e
             Quod
             de
             Cananaeis
             ,
             Iosh.
             23
             13.
             
          
           
             f
             Quod
             de
             Sodomitis
             ,
             2
             Pet.
             2.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             De
             Hebraeis
             ,
             Psal
             106.
             33.
             
          
           
             g
             Act.
             7.
             60.
             2
             
             Tim.
             4.
             16.
             
          
           
             h
             2
             Cor.
             4.
             4.
             
          
           
             i
             Mat.
             10.
             14
             
             Luk.
             9.
             5.
             
             &
             10.
             11.
             
             Act.
             13.
             51.
             
          
           
             k
             Esai
             .
             49.
             4.
             
          
           
             l
             Matth.
             10
             15.
             
          
           
             m
             Non
             salutis
             esse
             dispensatorem
             ,
             hoc
             est
             salutis
             etiam
             esse
             participem
             ,
             Aug.
             epist.
             140.
             
          
           
             n
             Animam
             faciunt
             ,
             etiam
             qui
             non
             habant
             .
             Contra
             quē
             Sen.
             Non
             faciunt
             animum
             ,
             quia
             nec
             habent
             .
          
           
             o
             Per
             lapideum
             canalem
             transit
             aqua
             ad
             arcolas
             ,
             in
             canali
             lapideo
             nihil
             generans
             ,
             sed
             tamē
             hortis
             plurimii
             fructum
             affert
             .
             Aug.
             in
             Ioan.
             ●r
             .
             5.
             
          
           
             p
             Hermae
             ,
             siue
             Statuae
             Mercuriales
             .
             Ier.
             31.
             21.
             
          
           
             †
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Diogenis
             dictum
             .
             Stob.
             c.
             23.
             
             Quod
             &
             de
             Peripateticis
             Cleanthes
             ●sur●auit
             .
             Laert.
             
          
           
             *
             Antisthenem
             Diogenes
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             dixit
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Din
             Prus.
             orat
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             “
             Aqua
             baptismatis
             baptizatos
             ad
             regnum
             caeleste
             mitt●t
             ,
             &
             ipsapostea
             in
             cleacam
             descendit
             .
             Gregor
             .
             in
             Euang
             hom
             .
             17.
             
          
           
             r
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             s
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             t
             〈…〉
             
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Method
             .
             apud
             Epishan
             .
             haeres
             .
             64.
             
          
           
             x
             Qui
             dicunt
             &
             non
             faciunt
             .
             M●tih
             .
             23.
             3.
             
          
           
             y
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Basil.
             in
             Psalm
             .
             63.
             
             Quod
             iussit
             &
             gassit
             .
             Bern.
             epist.
             42.
             &
             in
             Cant.
             20.
             
             Non
             verbis
             solum
             praeduans
             ,
             sed
             exemplis
             .
             Idem
             de
             temp
             .
             51.
             〈◊〉
             de
             Origen●
             Euseb.
             hist.
             lib.
             6.
             cap.
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isider
             .
             Pelus
             .
             lib.
             2.
             〈…〉
             st
             .
             251.
             &
             〈…〉
             st
             .
             271.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Itaque
             Menander
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Suadet
             loquentis
             vita
             ,
             non
             oratio
             .
             Plutare
             .
             de
             leg
             .
             poet
             .
             &
             praecept
             .
             pol
             t.
             Et
             Gregor
             .
             Nazian
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Qui
             docent
             tantum
             〈◊〉
             faciunt
             ,
             ipsi
             praeceptis
             suis
             detrahunt
             pondus
             .
             Bonum
             quidem
             est
             recta
             &
             honesta
             praecip●re
             :
             sed
             nisi
             &
             facias
             ,
             mendacium
             est
             .
             Lactant.
             instit
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             16.
             
             Nisi
             &
             〈◊〉
             que
             praecipit
             ,
             soluta
             praecepta
             sunt
             .
             Qui
             praecipiunt
             ,
             nec
             saciunt
             ,
             abest
             ab
             cis
             sides
             .
             Praeceptus
             〈◊〉
             suis
             fidem
             de●abit
             ,
             qui
             quod
             verbis
             astr●re
             conatur
             ,
             r●●psa
             resoluit
             .
             Ibid.
             lib.
             4.
             cap.
             23.
             
          
           
             z
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isid
             .
             〈◊〉
             l●b
             .
             2.
             epist.
             275.
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Gregor
             .
             Nazian
             .
             in
             Easil
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pluta●e
             .
             de
             Stoic
             .
             repugn
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Si
             〈…〉
             cat
             .
             epist.
             37.
             
             Concordet
             sermo
             cu●
             vita
             .
             S●nec
             .
             epist.
             75.
             
             Ad
             legem
             suam
             quisque
             vi●at
             ,
             〈…〉
             vita
             d●ss●ntiat
             .
             Idem
             epist.
             20.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isid.
             Pel.
             lib.
             3.
             ep
             .
             3●●
             .
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             Qu●●
             erimobten
             p●ret
             ,
             〈…〉
             .
             235.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aristot.
             Ethic.
             lib.
             10.
             cap.
             1.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             e
             Vt
             enim
             de
             pictore
             ,
             scalptore
             ,
             fictore
             nisi
             artifex
             iudicare
             ;
             ita
             nisi
             sapiens
             non
             potst
             perspicere
             sapientem
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             1.
             epist.
             10.
             
          
           
             f
             Miror
             magis
             ,
             quô
             magis
             intelligo
             .
             Idem
             de
             Euphrate
             ibid.
             
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isid.
             l.
             2.
             ep
             .
             131.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             ep
             .
             175.
             ex
             .
             Mat.
             10.
             16.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Idē
             ibid.
             Nō
             est
             vera
             simplic●as
             ,
             nisi
             animiocul●
             ,
             et
             plus
             sit
             ,
             qui
             fallere
             nolit
             ,
             et
             cantus
             sit
             ,
             quo
             falli
             non
             possit
             .
             Bern.
             de
             praecept
             .
             &
             dispens
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Vt
             animi
             scasa
             elequt
             ,
             &
             apte
             possi
             ,
             &
             li●
             err
             a●●deat
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             T
             〈…〉
             .
             3.
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             2
             Tim.
             2.
             2.
             
             T
             it
             1.
             6
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             G●eg
             .
             N●k
             .
             in
             Ba●il
             .
             &
             Is●●
             .
             Peld
             .
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             302.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Mat.
             5.
             19.
             
             Isid.
             ib
             〈…〉
             .
             cp
             .
             235.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Greg.
             Naz.
             ib
             d.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Schol.
             A●siaph
             .
             Plut.
             Muti
             siquidem
             〈…〉
             est
             ?
             Esai
             .
             56.
             10.
             
             Innocens
             &
             absque
             sermine
             conuersatio
             ,
             quantū
             exemplo
             prodest
             ,
             〈…〉
             no●
             〈◊〉
             Hier●ad
             Ocean
             .
          
           
             m
             Ier.
             1.
             17.
             
             Act.
             4.
             29.
             
             Ephes.
             6.
             19.
             
             Tit.
             2.
             15.
             
          
           
             n
             Quis
             tibi
             〈…〉
             Dei
             non
             audebit
             ?
             Ambr.
             ep
             .
             29.
             
             Itaque
             Greg.
             Naz.
             ad
             Eunō
             5.
             
             Oij
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             N●si
             sid●liter
             dixcrim
             ,
             vobis
             erit
             〈…〉
             sum
             ,
             mibip
             〈…〉
             o
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             Tuneo
             itaque
             damnum
             vestrum
             ,
             timeo
             damnationem
             m●am
             ,
             fi
             tacuero
             .
             〈…〉
             .
             99.
             
          
           
             o
             D
             〈…〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plin.
             See.
             l.
             1.
             cp
             .
             20.
             &
             〈◊〉
             relinqu●bat
             .
             Val.
             Max
             l.
             8.
             c
             9.
             
          
           
             *
             Quem
             imitari
             plurimi
             concupiscant
             ,
             poucissimi
             pussint
             .
             Plin.
             de
             ●●nton
             .
             l.
             5.
             cp
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Themislod●●
             apud
             Plut.
             in
             Them.
             &
             in
             a●
             ophth
             .
          
           
             q
             Nam
             &
             gladio
             lingua
             consern
             solet
             .
             Diogenes
             de
             spur●a
             di●●i●ne
             à
             pulchro
             pros●cta
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             L●●rt
             .
             Et
             Apul
             .
             florid
             .
             3.
             vt
             gladius
             vsu
             splendescit
             ,
             situ
             rubiginat
             .
             ita
             vox
             in
             vagina
             silentij
             condita
             diutino
             torpore
             hebttatur
             .
             Sed
             &
             s●r●o
             diuinus
             glad●us
             dicitur
             ,
             Esai
             49.
             2
             ,
             Ephes.
             6.
             17.
             
          
           
             r
             For
             their
             meetings
             on
             St.
             Themas
             day
             .
          
           
             s
             For
             their
             Moonday
             feasts
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             dep●up●●t
             .
             Id
             〈…〉
             que
             in
             A
             〈…〉
             al.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Quibus
             gemina
             sunt
             Philostrati
             illa
             cp
             .
             2.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &c.
             Itaque
             quod
             Plin.
             l.
             6
             cp
             27.
             
             Facilis
             〈◊〉
             ;
             nonfacilis
             electio
             .
             est
             enim
             ex
             〈…〉
             s
             eius
             l●rga
             materia
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             in
             Patrem
             .
          
           
             x
             Sicut
             l●●erna
             se
             consumit
             in
             seru
             〈…〉
             um
             al●orum
             .
             Iac.
             de
             Vorag
             .
             de
             Ioan
             Bapt.
             6.
             
          
           
             y
             Esai
             .
             ●9●
             .
          
           
             z
             Esai
             .
             38.
             
             2●
             .
          
           
             *
             Psal.
             135.
             6.
             
             Ephes.
             1.
             11.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A01523-e8380
           
             Abrahams
             Death
             .
          
           
             Of
             it
             foure
             Particulars
             .
          
           
             1
             Quis
             ,
             Who.
             
          
           
             2
             Quando
             ,
             When.
             
          
           
             3
             Q●omodo
             ,
             How.
             
          
           
             4
             Quô
             ,
             Whither
             .
          
           
             Particular
             〈◊〉
             .
             Quis
             Person
             ,
             Who.
             Point
             1.
             
          
           
             a
             Gen.
             20.
             7.
             
          
           
             b
             Gen.
             23.
             6.
             
          
           
             c
             I●m
             2.
             23.
             2
             
             Chron.
             20.
             7.
             
             Esai
             .
             41.
             8.
             
          
           
             d
             Rom.
             4.
             16.
             
          
           
             e
             Iohn
             8.
             54.
             
          
           
             f
             Iohn
             11.
             
             〈◊〉
             ,
             36.
             
          
           
             g
             Iohn
             11.
             11.
             
          
           
             h
             fohn
             11.
             14.
             
          
           
             i
             Luke
             12.
             4.
             
             Iohn
             12.
             14
             ,
             15.
             
          
           
             k
             Matth.
             20.
             23.
             
             Luke
             21.
             16.
             
             Iohn
             2●
             .
             19.
             
             Act.
             12.
             2
             ,
             &
             20.
             29.
             
          
           
             l
             Iohn
             21.
             23.
             
          
           
             n
             Sic
             eum
             volo
             manere
             ,
             &c.
             Vulg.
             perperam
             .
             Quod
             sequ●●tur
             tamen
             Ambros
             .
             in
             Psal.
             45.
             
             &
             .
             118.
             
             Aug.
             in
             Ioan.
             124.
             &
             de
             temp
             .
             149.
             
             B●da
             ,
             Lyra
             ,
             Rupert
             .
             &c.
             Propugnat
             Georg.
             Trapez
             .
             oppugnat
             Card.
             Bessarion
             .
             Graeci
             codices
             resellunt
             .
          
           
             o
             1
             Sam
             13.
             13.
             
          
           
             m
             Iohn
             21.
             22.
             
          
           
             p
             1
             King.
             2.
             1.
             
          
           
             q
             Zech.
             1.
             5.
             
          
           
             r
             Iohn
             8.
             52.
             
          
           
             s
             Psal.
             49.
             10.
             
          
           
             t
             Ezek.
             21.
             4.
             
          
           
             x
             Esai
             .
             57.
             1.
             
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Menand
             .
             Plut.
             ad
             Apollon
             .
             
               God
               taketh
               the●●
               soonest
               ,
               whom
               hee
               loueth
               best
               .
            
             Mo●●ce
             t●
             epitaph
             .
             sui
             .
          
           
             y
             1
             King.
             14.
             12
             ,
             13.
             
             Reason
             .
          
           
             Natural
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             a
             2
             Cor.
             4.
             7.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Testacea
             vasa
             .
             Hier.
             de
             virgin
             .
             fictilia
             .
             Greg.
             Mor.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             6.
             
             Natural
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             Esai
             64.
             8.
             
          
           
             d
             Ier.
             18
             6.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Prov.
             Graec.
             —
             Vulgus
             fictilis
             ,
             Qu●
             simul
             offendit
             ad
             fortunam
             ,
             frangitur
             .
             Phaedr
             .
             fab
             .
             72.
             
             Spirituall
             1.
             
          
           
             e
             Eccles.
             9.
             2.
             
             Cuiuis
             potest
             accidere
             ,
             quod
             cuiquam
             potest
             .
             P.
             Syr.
             Spirituall
             2.
             
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             casus
             .
          
           
             g
             Malac.
             3.
             18.
             
          
           
             h
             Zech.
             5.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Spirituall
             3.
             
          
           
             i
             Iuramentum
             reuerenti
             .
             Iun.
             timenti
             .
             Pisc.
             Spirituall
             4.
             
          
           
             k
             Apoc.
             14.
             13.
             
          
           
             l
             2
             Tim.
             4.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             m
             2
             Tim.
             2.
             5.
             
             Iam.
             1.
             12.
             
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plutarc
             .
             contr
             .
             Epic.
             
          
           
             o
             Rom.
             8.
             10.
             
          
           
             p
             Rom.
             7.
             24.
             
          
           
             q
             Rom.
             6.
             7.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antiphan
             .
             Moriar
             ?
             desinam
             alligari
             posse
             ,
             desinam
             aegrotareposse
             ,
             desinam
             posse
             mori
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             24.
             
          
           
             s
             2
             Cor.
             5.
             4.
             
          
           
             u
             2
             C●r
             .
             5.
             6.
             
          
           
             Spirituall
             .
             5.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Gre
             Naz.
             in
             Basil
             ,
             Spirituall
             6.
             
          
           
             x
             2
             〈…〉
             58.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Gr●g
             .
             Naz.
             in
             Patr.
             
          
           
             y
             Philip.
             〈◊〉
             23.
             
             Obiect
             .
             I.
             
          
           
             z
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             vti
             Homer
             .
             Ody
             〈…〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Solu●re
             ,
             v●l●ram
             soluere
             :
             vt
             Fab.
             instit
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             P●rm
             t●amus
             vela
             ventis
             ,
             et
             oram
             soluentibus
             bene
             pre
             ,
             emu●
             .
             Et
             l.
             4
             Solu●mus
             oram
             ,
             prosecti
             sumi●s
             .
             Vtà
             nau●gatur●s
             tract●
             sit
             Uid
             .
             P●sc
             .
             in
             Luc.
             12.
             36.
             
             Hinc
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             2
             Tim.
             4.
             6.
             
          
           
             a
             Hebr.
             1●
             .
             5.
             
          
           
             b
             2
             King.
             2.
             11.
             
          
           
             Answ.
             
          
           
             c
             Pr
             〈…〉
             a
             siagularia
             regulam
             non
             fa
             iunt
             ,
             regulam
             nō
             i●f●ingunt
             .
             Priuil●gis
             sing●●orum
             le
             〈…〉
             me
             mmunem
             ●o
             s
             〈…〉
             t.
             H
             〈…〉
             on
             .
             in
             〈◊〉
             1
             Bed.
             n
             Act.
             
          
           
             e
             Esai
             .
             38.
             3.
             
          
           
             f
             Gen.
             5.
             24.
             
          
           
             g
             2
             King.
             20.
             21.
             
          
           
             h
             2
             King.
             20.
             6.
             
          
           
             i
             2
             King.
             〈◊〉
             .
             7.
             
          
           
             k
             2
             King.
             2.
             15.
             
          
           
             l
             2
             King.
             13.
             20.
             
          
           
             m
             2
             King
             13.
             21.
             
          
           
             n
             Pers●nasi●
             ▪
             ●ctio
             moritur
             cum
             I
             〈…〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈…〉
             uris
             sunt
             pr
             〈…〉
             legia
             .
             N●n
             sunt
             amplianda
             priuil●gia
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             d
             Heb●
             9
             26.
             
          
           
             o
             Apo.
             2.
             10.
             13.
             
          
           
             Obiection
             2.
             
          
           
             p
             Rom
             4
             16.
             
          
           
             q
             I●bn
             8.
             51.
             
          
           
             r
             Mortem
             videre
             .
             i
             mori
             .
             Psal.
             49.
             9.
             
             &
             98.
             48.
             
             ●eb●
             .
             11.
             6.
             
             Sicut
             vid●re
             vi●am
             ●i
             .
             viuere
             ,
             I●bn
             3.
             36.
             
             Ineptum
             est
             enim
             quod
             C●rysost
             .
             nom
             .
             nescio
             quis
             in
             Marc
             10.
             distinguit
             inter
             mortem
             gustare
             &
             videre
             .
             Answ.
             
          
           
             s
             Iubn
             11.
             26.
             
          
           
             t
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             a
             1
             ●or
             .
             15
             45.
             
          
           
             b
             Luke
             9
             60.
             
          
           
             c
             G●n
             .
             2.
             7.
             
          
           
             d
             Rom
             8.
             10.
             
          
           
             e
             Ia●
             .
             2
             26.
             
          
           
             f
             Ep
             〈…〉
             s
             2.
             1
             ,
             12
             &
             4
             18.
             
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             G●eg
             .
             N●z
             .
             a
             〈…〉
             g.
             Q●od
             an
             〈…〉
             a
             ●oc
             Deus
             est
             an●mae
             .
             Bern.
             s●rm
             .
             Par●
             3.
             
          
           
             h
             〈…〉
             a
             73
             26.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isia
             .
             P
             〈…〉
             3.
             ep
             .
             252.
             
             Sicut
             anim●
             v●●a
             est
             co●poris
             〈…〉
             ita
             Deus
             vita
             est
             an●mae
             .
             Ber.
             ser
             part
             3
             V
             〈…〉
             nis
             an
             ma
             est
             ,
             vita
             animae
             Deus
             est
             Aug.
             deci●it
             .
             l.
             19.
             c.
             6.
             &
             de
             v●rb
             .
             Apost
             .
             ●8
             .
             &
             〈◊〉
             Sanci
             .
             16
             A●esse
             debet
             ,
             vt
             viuat
             corpus
             ,
             anima
             ,
             vt
             viuat
             anima
             ,
             D●us
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             i
             Psal.
             73
             27.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isid.
             ibid.
             Moritur
             corpus
             cum
             re●edit
             anima
             :
             mo●●tur
             anima
             ,
             si
             re●●da
             Deus
             .
             Aug.
             de
             verb.
             Apost
             .
             28.
             
             Corpus
             mortu●m
             est
             sine
             anima
             ;
             anima
             m
             〈…〉
             sine
             Deo.
             Idem
             de
             Sanct.
             13.
             
             Mors
             co
             poris
             a
             spiritu
             deser●
             ;
             mors
             spirit
             '
             à
             Deo.
             Idem
             de
             C●ui
             .
             l.
             19.
             c.
             26.
             
          
           
             u
             Eccle
             12.
             7.
             
          
           
             x
             Rom.
             8.
             38
             ,
             39.
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Callimach
             epigr.
             14.
             
             Qu●p●●
             virtutem
             〈◊〉
             ,
             ba●d
             ●s
             interit
             .
             Plaut
             .
             Capt.
             3.
             5.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chrysost.
             in
             Philip
             .
             hom
             .
             3.
             
             Quod
             a
             Iudaeo●um
             doctoribus
             tractum
             docet
             10.
             
             Capnio
             in
             Cabal
             .
             lib.
             1.
             pag
             755.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             1
             Tim.
             5.
             6.
             
          
           
             d
             Viuunt
             .
             omnes
             Deo
             ,
             Luke
             10.
             38.
             
          
           
             e
             Per
             vitam
             ad
             mortē
             〈◊〉
             est
             .
          
           
             f
             Per
             mortem
             ad
             vitam
             reditus
             est
             .
             Ambr.
             de
             bon
             .
             mort
             .
          
           
             g
             Non
             est
             vita
             sed
             mors
             dicenda
             ,
             quae
             viuentem
             à
             Christo
             separat
             .
          
           
             h
             Non
             est
             m.
             sed
             v.
             dic
             .
             quae
             morientem
             Christo
             sociat
             .
             Idem
             de
             Abel
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             9.
             
          
           
             Vse
             1.
             
          
           
             i
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Plut.
             in
             apophth
             .
             &
             de
             laud.
             sui
             .
             Isid.
             Pel.
             l.
             3
             〈…〉
             .
             154.
             
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Oppian
             .
             venat
             .
             lib
             1.
             
             Auia
             —
             peragro
             loca
             ,
             nullius
             ante
             Trita
             solo
             .
             Lucret.
             lib.
             1.
             
             &
             4.
             
          
           
             l
             Qui
             cum
             Horat.
             lib.
             1.
             ep
             .
             19.
             dicere
             poterat
             ;
             Libera
             per
             vacuum
             posui
             vestigia
             princeps
             :
             Non
             〈◊〉
             meo
             press●
             pede
             .
          
           
             m
             Matth.
             23.
             35.
             
             Iustitiae
             princeps
             :
             cui
             Christus
             iustitiae
             primatum
             tribuit
             .
             Aug.
             nom
             .
             de
             mi●ab
             .
             SSae
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chrysost
             in
             Gen.
             21.
             
          
           
             o
             Hac
             iter
             ad
             superos
             ,
             magnique
             ad
             tecta
             Tonantis
             .
             Ouid
             .
             Met.
             l.
             1
             Ianua
             vitae
             ,
             portagloriae
             .
             Bern.
             de
             temp
             .
             48.
             
          
           
             p
             Si
             quid
             incommodi
             aut
             motus
             in
             hoc
             negotio
             est
             ,
             ●●orientis
             vitium
             est
             .
             Bassus
             apud
             Senec.
             epist.
             30.
             
          
           
             q
             Quomodo
             malū
             ,
             quod
             a
             Deo
             pro
             bono
             maximo
             datum
             est
             ?
             Cic.
             Tuscul
             l.
             1.
             
          
           
             r
             1
             Thess.
             4.
             14.
             
             Non
             est
             lugendus
             qui
             antecedit
             ,
             sed
             desiderandus
             ,
             &c.
             Cur
             enim
             immoderate
             feras
             abisse
             ,
             quem
             mox
             consequeris
             ?
             Tertul.
             de
             patient
             .
             Quod
             latius
             Cypr.
             de
             mortal
             .
             Non
             sunt
             lugendi
             fratres
             nostri
             accersione
             don
             inica
             de
             seculo
             liberati
             ,
             cum
             sciamus
             eos
             non
             ami●●i
             sed
             praemitti
             ,
             recedentes
             praecedere
             ;
             ut
             pro
             〈…〉
             es
             &
             〈◊〉
             desiderari
             eos
             debere
             ,
             non
             plangi
             .
          
           
             s
             Apoc.
             14.
             13.
             
          
           
             t
             Hebr.
             11.
             13.
             
          
           
             Vse
             2.
             
          
           
             u
             Ab●erunt
             non
             ob●●runt
             .
             Ambr.
             in
             Theodos.
             
          
           
             x
             Praecesserunt
             ,
             non
             decess●runt
             .
             Aug.
             de
             diuers
             .
             43.
             
             Pro●ecti
             ,
             non
             omissi
             .
             ●i●●ron
             .
             ad
             Saluin
             .
          
           
             y
             2
             Sam.
             12.
             23.
             
          
           
             z
             Dimissi
             ,
             praem
             ssi
             ,
             non
             amissi
             .
             Cypr.
             sup
             .
             Aug.
             cp
             .
             6.
             
             &
             ●20
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             63.
             
             &
             99.
             &
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             19
             
          
           
             a
             Abitus
             ,
             Luke
             2.
             29.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plato
             apolog
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Simocat
             .
             ep
             .
             25.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chrysost.
             tom
             .
             6.
             ser.
             43.
             
             Profectio
             est
             ,
             quam
             mortem
             putamus
             .
             Tertul.
             de
             patient
             .
          
           
             b
             Exitus
             .
             Luke
             9.
             31.
             2
             
             Pet.
             1.
             15.
             
             Excessus
             de
             corpore
             .
             Tertul
             de
             resur
             .
             de
             mundo
             digredi
             .
             Ammian
             .
             l.
             29.
             
             Mors
             migratio
             est
             .
             Cic.
             Tuscul.
             l.
             1.
             migrare
             magis
             quam
             mori
             .
             Vell●iusl
             1.
             non
             emori
             ,
             sed
             emigrare
             .
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Nepot
             .
          
           
             c
             Transitus
             ,
             Iohn
             13.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chrysost.
             &
             Theophil
             .
             Morstransitus
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             65.
             
             Non
             est
             〈◊〉
             sed
             transitus
             .
             Cypr.
             de
             mortal
             .
          
           
             d
             Reditus
             .
             Eccles.
             12
             7.
             ●●p●triasse
             erit
             b●c
             .
             Bern
             de
             consid
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             5
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Epcharm
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ar
             〈…〉
             .
             Epict
             〈…〉
             R●uerti
             ,
             vnde
             vene
             〈…〉
             s
             ,
             quid
             graue
             est
             ?
             S
             〈…〉
             tranq
             .
             c.
             11.
             
             Itaque
             Pl
             〈…〉
             us
             exp●sans
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             S
             〈…〉
             s.
             epist.
             139.
             
          
           
             e
             Obitus
             .
             Non
             obiit
             .
             Ambr.
             de
             Th●od
             .
          
           
             f
             Int●ritus
             .
             I●teritus
             non
             est
             .
             Ambr.
             de
             bon
             .
             mort
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             8.
             
             &
             Cic.
             Tus●
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             Mors
             non
             interimit
             .
             Lucret
             .
             l.
             2.
             
             H●ud
             is
             in●●rit
             .
             Plaut
             .
             sup
             .
          
           
             g
             Intermissio
             .
             Mors
             intermi●●it
             vi●am
             ,
             non
             erip●t
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             36.
             nee
             illud
             qu
             〈…〉
             e.
             
          
           
             h
             Intercisio
             .
          
           
             i
             Diminutio
             .
          
           
             k
             Luges
             corpus
             ,
             i
             quo
             recessit
             anima
             ?
             luge
             animā
             ,
             à
             qua
             recessit
             D●us
             .
             Aug.
             de
             Sanct.
             13.
             
          
           
             l
             1
             Sam.
             15
             35.
             
          
           
             m
             2
             Co●
             .
             12
             21.
             
          
           
             n
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Chryso●●
             .
             in
             Philip.
             ●om
             .
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isid.
             Pel.
             l.
             1.
             cp
             .
             334.
             
          
           
             Vse
             3.
             
          
           
             o
             2
             Sam.
             14
             14.
             
             Rom.
             4
             12.
             
             Heb.
             9.
             26.
             
             Mors
             per
             o●nes
             it
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             95.
             
             Mors
             omnes
             aequè
             vocat
             .
             Ir●tis
             d●js
             propi●jisque
             mori●dum
             est
             .
             Idem
             quaest
             .
             nat
             .
             l.
             2.
             c.
             59.
             
          
           
             p
             Io●●
             12
             35.
             
          
           
             q
             Iohn
             9.
             4.
             
          
           
             r
             Nostros
             omnes
             sic
             habeamus
             ,
             tanquam
             nihil
             nobis
             de
             p●rpetuitate
             ,
             imò
             nihil
             de
             diuturnitate
             eorum
             promissum
             sit
             .
             Tanquam
             v●●essuris
             ,
             imò
             iam
             recedē
             ibus
             fruamur
             .
             Tanquam
             extemplò
             abituros
             possideamꝰ
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Marc.
             cap.
             10.
             
          
           
             s
             Ad
             quae
             noscenda
             iter
             ingredi
             ,
             transmittere
             maria
             solemus
             ,
             ea
             sub
             oculis
             posita
             negligimus
             :
             〈◊〉
             quia
             ita
             comparatum
             est
             ,
             ut
             proximorū
             incuriosi
             longinqua
             sectemur
             ,
             sed
             quod
             omnium
             rerum
             cupido
             languescit
             ,
             cum
             facilis
             occasio
             est
             ;
             seu
             quod
             differimus
             ,
             tanquā
             saepe
             v●suri
             ,
             quod
             datur
             videre
             ,
             quoties
             v●lis
             cernere
             .
             Plin.
             sec.
             l.
             8.
             ep
             .
             20.
             
          
           
             t
             Si●nter
             eos
             quos
             nunquam
             vidimus
             ,
             floruisset
             ,
             non
             solum
             libros
             eius
             ,
             verum
             euam
             imagines
             cōquireremus
             ,
             ciusdē
             nunc
             honor
             praesentis
             &
             gratia
             ,
             quasi
             sati●tate
             .
             languescit
             .
             Idem
             lib.
             1.
             epist.
             16.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sophocl
             .
             A●ac
             .
          
           
             u
             Rerum
             natura
             tibi
             illum
             non
             mancipi●
             dedit
             ,
             sed
             commodavit
             Sen.
             ad
             Polyb.
             〈◊〉
             .
             19.
             
             Homo
             commodatus
             vitae
             ,
             non
             donatus
             est
             .
             P.
             Syr.
             
          
           
             x
             Non
             tam
             data
             ,
             quàm
             commodata
             .
             Pri●as
             .
             in
             1
             Cor.
             Fortuna
             vsu
             dat
             multa
             ,
             mancipio
             nihil
             .
             P.
             Syr.
             Nihil
             horum
             dono
             d●tur
             :
             collat
             〈…〉
             ijs
             &
             ad
             dominos
             redituris
             instrumetis
             scena
             adornatur
             :
             mutuò
             accipimus
             in
             incertum
             diem
             ;
             ●sus
             fructus
             tantiem
             noster
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             10.
             
             Exposition
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Phoeniss
             .
          
           
             y
             Vita
             data
             est
             vtenda
             ;
             data
             est
             sine
             foenore
             nobis
             Mutua
             ,
             nec
             c●rto
             persolüenda
             die
             .
             Pedo
             ad
             Liu.
             vsuram
             vitae
             natura
             dedit
             ,
             ●●nquam
             pecuniae
             ,
             nulla
             pr●stituta
             die
             .
             Cic.
             Tusc.
             l.
             1.
             
             Vitaque
             mancipio
             nulli
             datur
             ,
             omnibus
             vsu.
             Lucret.
             l.
             3.
             
             Vsu
             &
             fructu
             nobis
             est
             vita
             ,
             non
             mancipio
             tradita
             .
             Arnob.
             l.
             2.
             
          
           
             z
             Cuius
             tempus
             ille
             ar
             〈…〉
             er
             muneris
             tui
             temperat
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           
             Particular
             2.
             
             Quomodò
             .
             Manner
             How.
             Exposition
             1.
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             expirauit
             .
          
           
             b
             Aequo
             ani●o
             .
             Caluin
             .
          
           
             c
             Iohn
             19.
             30.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             e
             Sapientis
             est
             ●xire
             ,
             non
             &
             e●●ci
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             70.
             
          
           
             f
             Luke
             2.
             29.
             
             Act.
             7.
             59.
             2
             
             Sam.
             15.
             26.
             1
             
             Pet.
             4.
             19.
             
          
           
             g
             De
             l●ui
             &
             leni
             morte
             ,
             D.
             Kimchi
             &
             Aben-ezra
             .
          
           
             h
             Gen.
             49.
             33.
             
          
           
             i
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pl●t●
             Ti.
             Exception
             .
             maeo
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             S●pbocl
             .
             Hinc
             Themist
             .
             Exposition
             3.
             de
             anima
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Point
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Senectu●
             leniter
             emittit
             ,
             non
             repente
             auulsum
             vitae
             ,
             sed
             minutatim
             subduct●m
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             30.
             
             Animam
             senilem
             mollis
             exoluit
             Sopor
             .
             Sen.
             O●dip
             .
             4.
             2.
             
             Proofe
             1.
             
          
           
             k
             Adolescent●s
             m●ri
             sic
             mi●●
             vi
             〈…〉
             ,
             vt
             cum
             aquae
             multitudine
             vis
             flam
             〈…〉
             opprimitur
             :
             se●es
             autem
             ,
             sicun
             cum
             sua
             sp●nte
             nulla
             adhibita
             vi
             consumptus
             ignis
             extinguitur
             .
             Et
             quasi
             poma
             ex
             arboribus
             ,
             si
             crudasunt
             ,
             vi
             auelluntur
             ,
             si
             matura
             &
             cocta
             ,
             decidunt
             ;
             sic
             vitam
             adolescentibus
             vis
             aufert
             ,
             senibu●
             matu●itas
             .
             Cic.
             de
             se●ect
             .
          
           
             l
             Ignis
             qui
             alimentis
             deficitur
             ,
             sua
             sponte
             subfidit
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             30.
             
          
           
             m
             Gen.
             6.
             17.
             
             &
             7.
             21.
             
             Numb
             .
             17.
             12
             ,
             13.
             
             &
             20.
             3.
             
          
           
             n
             Iob
             3.
             11.
             
             &
             10.
             18.
             
          
           
             o
             Iosh.
             22.
             20.
             
             Psal.
             88.
             15.
             
             Z●ch
             .
             13.
             8.
             
          
           
             p
             Expiraui●
             .
          
           
             q
             Spiritum
             efflauit
             .
          
           
             r
             Spiritus
             defecit
             .
          
           
             s
             Spiritus
             ab●js
             .
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pindar
             .
             Pyth.
             8.
             
             Plutarc
             .
             ad
             Apollon
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             P●u●
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Aes●hyl
             Stob.
             cap.
             96.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Greg.
             Naz.
             ad
             Iulian
             .
          
           
             e
             Vt
             calidus
             fu
             〈…〉
             abignibus
             Vanescit
             per
             spatium
             brcue
             sord
             dus
             :
             Sic
             bic
             quo
             ●egimur
             ,
             spiritus
             ●ff●uit
             .
             Sen.
             Troad
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Soph●●l
             .
             Aiac
             .
          
           
             †
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             ad
             Apollon
             .
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             ex
             Gen.
             2.
             7.
             
          
           
             g
             Psal.
             78.
             39.
             
             Esai
             .
             2.
             22.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             venti
             flatum
             &
             spiritū
             hominis
             designat
             .
             Eccles.
             1.
             6.
             
             &
             12.
             7.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             item
             vtrumque
             denotat
             .
             Ioan.
             3.
             8.
             
             &
             4.
             24.
             sed
             &
             anima
             &
             animus
             quasi
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             dictus
             ,
             Cassiod
             Canin
             .
             alij
             .
             &
             pro
             vento
             etiam
             vsurpatur
             .
             Seru.
             in
             Aen.
             ●1
             .
          
           
             h
             Gen.
             3.
             19.
             
             &
             18.
             21.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             dust
             and
             ashes
             .
          
           
             i
             Sirac
             .
             14.
             18.
             
             &
             Aug.
             in
             Psal.
             101.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Musaeus
             .
             Clem.
             strom
             .
             l.
             6.
             
             Et
             ab
             ills
             Homer
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &c.
             Et
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             Quod
             laudat
             Zeno.
             Laert.
             citant
             Clem.
             strom
             .
             l.
             6.
             
             Plut.
             ad
             Apoll●n
             .
             &
             Lucian
             Episcop
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             tard
             .
             vindict
             .
             &
             de
             vit
             .
             Epicur
             .
             Sed
             &
             M
             mueru●●ss
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             &c.
             Stob.
             c.
             96.
             
             Et
             Aristoph
             .
             auib
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Clem.
             airom
             .
             l.
             5.
             
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             &c.
             Luc
             〈…〉
             .
             Episc●p
             .
             H●mo
             bulla
             .
             Varr●
             .
             rust
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             1.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Epicharm
             .
             Clem.
             strom
             .
             lib.
             5.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plutar●
             .
             sup
             .
          
           
             m
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Adam
             Abei●
             compar
             est
             .
             Ps.
             144.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             n
             Geneu
             .
             &
             Reg.
             Bibl.
             
          
           
             o
             Vet.
             Bibl.
             Angl.
             
          
           
             p
             Iob
             8.
             9.
             
             Psalm
             .
             102.
             11.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aristoph
             .
             auib
             .
             Clem.
             strom
             .
             l.
             5.
             
          
           
             q
             Psal.
             73.
             20.
             
             &
             90.
             5.
             
             Iob
             20.
             8.
             
          
           
             r
             Iob
             7.
             7.
             
          
           
             s
             Psal.
             78.
             39.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Soph●cl
             .
             Aia●
             .
          
           
             t
             Esai
             .
             2.
             22.
             
             Quod
             de
             senibus
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             30.
             
             Anim●
             senilu
             cum
             in
             primis
             fit
             labijs
             ,
             haud
             magna
             vià
             corpore
             distrahitur
             .
          
           
             u
             Psal.
             146.
             4.
             
          
           
             x
             Eccles.
             12.
             7.
             
          
           
             y
             Gen.
             2.
             7.
             
             &
             3.
             19.
             
          
           
             a
             Iob
             7.
             9.
             
             Vt
             ●ubes
             ,
             grauidas
             quas
             m●do
             vidimus
             ,
             Arctoi
             Borgae
             dissipat
             impetus
             .
             So●
             .
             Tr●ad
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             Iam.
             4.
             14.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Omnis
             Adam
             totus
             Abel
             .
             Psal.
             39.
             
             〈◊〉
             ,
             12.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             fundatus
             ,
             constitutus
             .
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Psal.
             62.
             9.
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Psal.
             62.
             9.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Esai
             40.
             17.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sophocl
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Iambl
             .
             hortat
             .
             c
             8.
             
             Proofe
             2.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Esai
             .
             40.
             17.
             
          
           
             i
             Ti
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             de
             baptism
             .
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Diogenes
             Perdiccae
             .
             Laert
             .
             Et
             Theodorus
             Lysimacho
             ;
             Enimuerò
             magnifi●a
             res
             tibi
             contigit
             ,
             quia
             ●antharidis
             vim
             assecutus
             es
             .
             Cic.
             Tusc.
             l.
             1.
             
             &
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             Anton.
             
          
           
             m
             Tu
             qui
             te
             Deum
             credis
             ,
             successu
             aliquo
             elatus
             ,
             quantulo
             serpētis
             dente
             perire
             potes
             ?
             Plin.
             l.
             7.
             c.
             7.
             
          
           
             n
             Conrad
             .
             Visperg
             .
             Na●cler
             .
             ex
             Ioan.
             Cremon
             .
             &
             Io.
             Bal.
             in
             Adrian
             .
             Pp
             4
             qu●
             a
             〈…〉
             Papatum
             
               Nicholas
               Breake-speare
            
             dicebatur
             .
          
           
             o
             Nihil
             tam
             exiguum
             est
             ,
             quod
             non
             in
             ●●r●●iem
             generis
             humani
             satis
             val
             at
             .
             Sen.
             nat
             .
             quaest
             .
             l.
             6.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           
             p
             V●gi●uli
             nos
             ,
             &
             ne
             toti●s
             quidem
             dolor
             ,
             sed
             aliqua
             〈◊〉
             latere
             eius
             s●issura
             conficit
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             q
             Quicquid
             enim
             fieri
             potuit
             vnquā
             ,
             &
             potest
             .
             Idem
             .
          
           
             r
             Tarquinius
             Priscus
             piscis
             spina
             inter
             coenandum
             susfocatus
             es●
             .
             Guide
             Bitur
             .
          
           
             s
             Anacr
             contem
             Vuae
             passae
             succo
             exiles
             virium
             reliquias
             fouentē
             vnicus
             granipertinacior
             in
             aridis
             faucibus
             humor
             absumpsit
             .
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             9
             c.
             12
             &
             Plin.
             l
             7.
             c.
             7.
             
             Quod
             de
             Sophocle
             etiam
             Sotades
             .
             Stob.
             c.
             96.
             
          
           
             t
             Fabius
             Senator
             poto
             in
             lactis
             haustis
             vno
             pilo
             strangulatus
             est
             .
             Plin.
             ibid.
             
          
           
             u
             Est
             quos
             potio
             strangulauerit
             malè
             lapsa
             per
             fouces
             :
             stillicidio
             perire
             potes
             .
             Sen.
             q.
             nat
             .
             l.
             6.
             c.
             2.
             
             Vse
             1.
             
          
           
             x
             Saliua
             crassior
             suff●cat
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             a
             Abortus
             causa
             sit
             odor
             a
             lucer●●rum
             extinctu
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             7.
             c.
             7.
             
             Nunquid
             vt
             homo
             concidatres
             magni
             molimenti
             est
             ?
             odor
             illisoporque
             ,
             &c.
             mortisera
             sunt
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             11.
             
             Animal
             aquarum
             nouitatibus
             ,
             flatuque
             non
             familiaris
             aquae
             ,
             &
             tenuissimis
             causis
             atque
             off●nsionibus
             morbidum
             ,
             putre
             ,
             cassum
             .
             Ibid.
             Iouinianus
             Imp.
             foetore
             prunarum
             &
             nidore
             parietum
             recens
             calceillitorum
             extinctus
             est
             .
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Nepot
             .
             Ammian
             .
             l.
             25.
             
             &
             Aur.
             Victor
             .
             Fato
             gemino
             &
             Q.
             Catulus
             ob●jt
             .
             Vell●●us
             l.
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             Psal.
             40.
             6
             ,
             7.
             
          
           
             c
             Psal
             103.
             15
             ,
             16.
             
          
           
             d
             Suppresso
             tantum
             spiritu
             esse
             desierunt
             Licinius
             Macer
             ,
             Zeno
             Cittieus
             ,
             Metrocles
             Cynicus
             ,
             Com●latro
             .
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             9
             c.
             ●2
             〈◊〉
             .
             ●●l
             .
             Suid.
             Hinc
             &
             Plin.
             l
             31.
             c.
             1.
             
             Nubes
             obtentu
             vital●m
             spiritum
             strangulant
             .
          
           
             e
             Psal.
             104
             29.
             
          
           
             f
             Ier.
             17.
             5.
             
          
           
             g
             Vti
             Laco
             de
             Athenis
             ,
             quas
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Pindarus
             dixit
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             h
             Esai
             .
             2.
             22.
             
          
           
             i
             Psal.
             146.
             3.
             
          
           
             k
             Psal.
             60.
             11.
             
          
           
             l
             Psal.
             78.
             39.
             
          
           
             m
             Psal.
             146.
             4.
             
          
           
             n
             Psal.
             82.
             7.
             
             Verum
             nos
             homunculi
             Sali●●
             〈◊〉
             animae
             ,
             qui
             cum
             extempso
             amisimus
             ,
             Aequo
             mendicus
             a●que
             ille
             opulentissimus
             Censetur
             censu
             ad
             Acherontem
             mortuus
             .
             Plaut
             .
             Trinum
             .
             2.
             4.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Lu●ian
             .
             Impares
             nas
             〈…〉
             r
             ,
             pares
             mori●ur
             :
             aequat
             omn●●
             cinis
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             91.
             〈…〉
             rs
             exaequat
             ●m●ia
             .
             Idem
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             10.
             
             Quis
             discer●at
             species
             mortuorum
             ?
             redoperiterram
             ,
             &
             diuites
             ,
             si
             potes
             ,
             depre
             〈…〉
             e.
             Ambr.
             de
             Nabuth
             .
             c.
             1.
             
             Hinc
             illud
             antholog
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             13.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             o
             Sunt
             infirma
             (
             infida
             )
             quaedamrefugia
             ;
             ad
             quae
             cum
             quis
             fugerit
             ,
             magis
             infirmatur
             ,
             quam
             confirmatur
             .
             Aug.
             in
             Psal.
             45.
             
          
           
             p
             Multi
             c●dentibus
             eis
             ad
             qu●s
             confugerant
             ,
             &
             ipsi
             quae
             siti
             sunt
             ,
             quos
             nemoquaereret
             ,
             si
             non
             ad
             eos
             confugissint
             .
             Aug.
             ibid.
             Quid
             ego
             de
             Regum
             familiaribus
             dicam
             ,
             quos
             quidem
             regia
             saepe
             incolumis
             ,
             saepe
             ●u●ē
             lapsa
             prosternit
             .
             ●●eth
             .
             consol
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             5.
             
          
           
             q
             Esai
             .
             30.
             3.
             
             &
             31.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             amic
             .
          
           
             r
             Ad
             omnia
             patienda
             pares
             sumus
             :
             nemo
             alter●
             f●agilior
             est
             :
             nemo
             in
             crastinū
             sui
             certior
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             91.
             
             Vt
             caetorū
             hominū
             ,
             ita
             principū
             illorum
             omniū
             ,
             qui
             Dij
             sibi
             videntur
             ,
             aeuum
             omne
             &
             br●ue
             &
             fragile
             est
             .
             P
             〈…〉
             n.
             Paneg.
             Psal.
             82.
             6
             ,
             7.
             
          
           
             s
             Psal.
             62.
             8.
             
             &
             84.
             12
             ,
             13.
             
             &
             146.
             5.
             
             Ier.
             17.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             t
             Esai
             .
             26.
             4.
             
             &
             54.
             10.
             
          
           
             u
             Quid
             est
             〈◊〉
             ?
             Vas
             fragile
             ,
             quassum
             ,
             ia●●atu
             ,
             non
             tempestate
             magna
             ,
             vt
             d●ssipetur
             ,
             est
             opus
             :
             vbicunque
             arietauerit
             ,
             soluitur
             .
             S●m
             .
             ad
             Mar●
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             11.
             
          
           
             x
             Salillum
             animae
             .
             Plau●
             .
             sup
             .
          
           
             y
             Anxiae
             ,
             solicitaeque
             tutelae
             ,
             precarij
             spiritus
             ,
             &
             malè
             inhorentis
             ,
             quem
             pauor
             repentinus
             ,
             aut
             ex
             improuiso
             sonus
             auribus
             grauis
             ex-Vse
             2.
             cutit
             .
             Sen.
             ibid.
             Cuius
             caduca
             possessio
             tam
             leu●afflatu
             c●cussadilabitur
             .
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             9.
             c.
             12.
             
          
           
             z
             Esa●
             .
             8.
             12
             ,
             13
             ,
             14.
             
             &
             51.
             6
             ,
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             12
             ,
             14.
             
             Matth.
             10.
             28.
             
             &
             16.
             25.
             
          
           
             a
             Iob
             14.
             14.
             
          
           
             b
             Gen.
             27.
             2.
             
             Eccles
             9.
             
             1●
             .
          
           
             c
             Sic
             quotidiè
             vinamus
             ,
             quasi
             die
             illa
             iudi●andi
             simus
             .
             H●eron
             .
             in
             Matth.
             23.
             
             Dies
             omnis
             pr●
             v●●im●
             habeatur
             .
             Martin
             .
             Du●iens
             .
             de
             morib
             .
             Respect
             1.
             
          
           
             d
             Omnem
             creded●ē
             tibi
             diluxisse
             supremum
             .
             Horat.
             l.
             1.
             ep
             .
             4.
             
             Sic
             ordinandꝰ
             est
             dies
             omnis
             ,
             tanquā
             cogat
             agmen
             ,
             &
             cōsummet
             atque
             expleat
             vitam
             .
             Sen
             ep
             .
             11.
             
             Qui
             omnes
             dies
             tanquam
             vltimum
             ordinat
             ,
             nec
             optat
             crastinum
             ,
             nec
             time●
             .
             Id
             〈…〉
             de
             breu
             .
             vit
             .
             c.
             7.
             
             Sic
             diem
             omnem
             aspi
             〈…〉
             ,
             tanquam
             esse
             vel
             vltimus
             possit
             .
             Paratus
             exire
             sum
             .
             Idem
             〈◊〉
             61.
             
          
           
             e
             Sirac
             .
             5.
             8.
             
          
           
             f
             D
             〈…〉
             .
             4.
             27.
             
          
           
             g
             Rom.
             6.
             2
             ,
             11.
             
          
           
             h
             Hoc
             citra
             diem●mortis
             praesta
             :
             morian
             〈…〉
             r
             ante
             te
             vitia
             tu●
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             27.
             
          
           
             i
             Ier.
             6.
             29.
             30.
             
             Vl
             〈…〉
             sne
             est
             criminum
             modus
             ?
             &
             non
             prius
             est
             vt
             de
             vitâ
             hamines
             quam
             de
             iniquitate
             d●scedāt
             ?
             Quis
             enim
             non
             cū
             suis
             iniquitatibus
             moritur
             ?
             &
             〈◊〉
             ipsis
             ad●odum
             a●que
             in
             ipsis
             sceteribꝰ
             〈…〉
             pelitur
             ?
             Sal.
             de
             prou
             .
             l.
             5.
             c.
             8.
             
             Non
             cessant
             vitia
             ciuiū
             vsque
             ad
             excidia
             ciuitatum
             .
             Pr●●
             est
             interire
             qu●
             co●r●gi
             :
             Prius
             ipsos
             ,
             quam
             in
             ipsis
             vitia
             ,
             non
             esse
             .
             ib.
             l.
             6.
             c.
             12.
             
          
           
             k
             Iohn
             8.
             22
             ,
             24.
             
          
           
             l
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             Eurip.
             Alcest
             .
             Qu●s
             enimest
             tam
             adolesc●ns
             ,
             cui
             fit
             exploratum
             se
             ad
             vesperū
             esse
             victurum
             ?
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             Quis
             s●it
             an
             adijciant
             hodiern●
             tempora
             vitae
             Crastina
             Dijsuperi
             ?
             Horat.
             carm
             .
             4.
             7.
             
             Nemo
             tā
             Respect
             2.
             diuos
             habuit
             fauentes
             ,
             Crastinum
             vt
             possit
             sibi
             polliceri
             .
             Sen.
             Thyest.
             3.
             
             Nihil
             dehodierna
             die
             promittitur
             ,
             ni●il
             de
             hac
             ●or●
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Mar●
             .
             c.
             10.
             
          
           
             m
             Vn●
             die
             ante
             mortem
             agas
             poenitentiam
             .
             R.
             Eleazar
             .
             Drus.
             apopht●
             .
             l.
             1.
             
          
           
             n
             Hodiè
             resipiscendum
             ,
             ne
             forte
             cras
             moriamur
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             o
             Quomodo
             enim
             de
             die
             in
             diem
             disferendo
             peccas
             ,
             ●um
             extremum
             diem
             tuum
             nescids
             ?
             Aug.
             ep
             .
             145.
             
          
           
             p
             Prou.
             27.
             1.
             
             Iam.
             4.
             13.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Anacrcon
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pindar
             .
             Isth
             8.
             —
             aetas
             quid
             ●rastinavoluat
             scire
             nefas
             homini
             .
             Stat
             Th●b
             .
             l.
             3.
             
             Ney●is
             quid
             serus
             vesper
             vehat
             .
             Varro
             .
             Liu.
             l.
             45.
             
             Gell.
             l.
             1.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             22.
             
          
           
             q
             Prou.
             6.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
          
           
             r
             2
             Tim.
             2.
             25
             ,
             26.
             
          
           
             s
             Prou.
             5.
             22.
             
             &
             29.
             6.
             
          
           
             t
             Vt
             quotidiè
             pridiè
             caueat
             ,
             ne
             faciat
             ,
             quod
             se
             pigent
             postridiè
             .
             Plaut
             .
             Sti●h
             .
             1.
             2.
             
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Zaleuc
             .
             legum
             prooem
             .
             Nuper
             me
             amicicuiusdam
             langu●r
             admonuit
             ,
             optimos
             esse
             nos
             ,
             dum
             infirmi
             sumus
             .
             Quem
             enim
             infirmum
             auaritia
             aut
             libido
             solicitat
             ?
             non
             am●ribus
             seruit
             ,
             non
             adpetit
             honores
             ,
             opes
             negligit
             ,
             nemini
             inuidet
             ,
             neminem
             desp●cit
             ;
             a●
             ne
             sermoni●us
             quidem
             malignis
             aut
             attendit
             aut
             alitur
             .
             Innoxiam
             in
             posterum
             ,
             si
             contingat
             euadere
             ,
             vitam
             destin●t
             .
             Plin.
             Sec.
             l.
             7.
             ep
             .
             25.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Tyr.
             Max.
             dissert
             .
             41.
             
          
           
             a
             Dan.
             5
             6.
             
          
           
             b
             2
             Sam.
             13.
             26
             ,
             29.
             
          
           
             c
             1
             King.
             16.
             9
             ,
             10.
             
          
           
             d
             Ita
             Archias
             caetèr●qu●
             tyranui
             Thebanioppressi
             sunt
             ,
             cum
             is
             vino
             plenus
             ,
             literas
             coniurationis
             indices
             puluino
             subi●cisset
             .
             Plut.
             de
             Socrat.
             gen
             .
             &
             sympos
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             3.
             &
             in
             Pelopid
             .
          
           
             e
             Numb
             .
             25.
             8.
             
          
           
             f
             Ita
             periere
             Spousippus
             Philos●phus
             .
             Tertul.
             apolog
             .
             Rodaldus
             Long●bard
             .
             Rex
             .
             Paul.
             Diac.
             lib.
             4.
             cap.
             17.
             
             Ioan.
             12.
             
             Pp.
             Luitprand
             .
             lib.
             6.
             cap.
             11.
             
          
           
             g
             Quosdam
             concubitus
             extinxit
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             66.
             
             Inter
             vsum
             Veneris
             absumptisunt
             .
             Corn.
             Gallus
             Praetorius
             ,
             &
             T.
             Haterius
             Eques
             Rom.
             Plin.
             lib.
             7.
             cap.
             53.
             
             &
             Val.
             Max.
             lib.
             9.
             cap.
             12.
             
             Bellrandus
             Ferrerius
             Hispan
             .
             Pontan
             .
             de
             obed
             .
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             10.
             
             Et
             Giachet
             .
             Salucianus
             vna
             cu●scortosu●
             .
             Fulg.
             lib
             9.
             cap.
             12.
             sed
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Philetaer
             .
             in
             Venatr
             .
             Athen.
             lib.
             13.
             
          
           
             *
             Num.
             16.
             32
             ,
             35.
             
          
           
             h
             Dan.
             434.
             
          
           
             i
             Accadion
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sed
             &
             Erasi
             〈…〉
             us
             sari
             fato
             〈…〉
             .
             Ath●nd
             .
             10.
             
             A●ginascil
             .
             vi
             〈…〉
             ,
             vt
             F●stus
             ,
             q
             ā
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Erasm.
             Ch
             〈…〉
             .
             4.
             ce●●
             .
             8.
             adag
             .
             2.
             
             L.
             Valla
             m●d●c
             〈◊〉
             ,
             dumm
             ●sip
             ●●o●em
             haurit
             ;
             Ap.
             S
             〈…〉
             seius
             ,
             c
             〈…〉
             hausisset
             .
             P
             〈…〉
             .
             7.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             53.
             
          
           
             k
             Dum
             resp
             〈…〉
             s
             ,
             quod
             aiunt
             ,
             v●●sa
             ▪
             Respect
             3.
             musque
             nos
             ,
             iam
             murtal
             〈…〉
             aderit
             .
             Sen.
             de
             ●ra
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             43.
             
          
           
             l
             Psal.
             66.
             18.
             
          
           
             m
             Gen.
             19.
             26.
             
             Ius
             .
             17.
             32.
             
          
           
             n
             Dr.
             Wilkinson
             Sermon
             .
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Orest
             .
             Impura
             m●n●e
             ,
             pura
             manu
             .
             Apul.
             ap●log
             .
          
           
             q
             Nulla
             res
             magis
             proderit
             ,
             quam
             c●gitatio
             mort●litatis
             .
             S●n.
             de●ra
             .
             l.
             3.
             c.
             42.
             
             Nih●l
             ●què
             profuerit
             ad
             temperantiam
             〈…〉
             ●erum
             ,
             quam
             srequens
             cog●tat●o
             breais
             au●
             ,
             &
             huius
             inc●rti
             .
             Idem
             ep
             .
             114.
             
          
           
             r
             Excisa
             sestine
             auolat
             .
             Psal.
             90.
             12.
             
             Anima
             a
             ●orpore
             segregata
             ,
             vento
             si
             niles
             auolamus
             .
             Hieron
             .
             ep
             .
             de
             Psal
             90.
             
          
           
             s
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Lucian
             .
             in
             Nigrin
             .
             Sed
             propera
             ,
             nec
             te
             venturas
             differ
             in
             horas
             .
             Qu●
             non
             est
             ho●iè
             ,
             cras
             minus
             ap●us
             erit
             .
             Ouid.
             remed
             .
             l.
             1.
             
          
           
             t
             Gal.
             6.
             10.
             
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Tempus
             vt
             noris
             ,
             iubet
             .
             Sed
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             iste
             tempestiuum
             tempus
             est
             .
             Auson
             .
             ex
             P
             〈…〉
             i
             sent
             .
          
           
             x
             Prou.
             3.
             28.
             
             Praeceptum
             de
             〈…〉
             icordiae
             operibus
             non
             differendis
             .
             Aug.
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             59.
             
             Cum
             potes
             henefa●●re
             ,
             noli
             differre
             .
             Polyc●rpi
             nom
             ,
             ep
             .
             ad
             Philip.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             50
             22.
             
          
           
             a
             Eccles.
             9.
             10.
             
             Quicquid
             agis
             ,
             agas
             pr●
             virlbus
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             .
             des●●
             .
          
           
             b
             Eccles.
             11.
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             Eccles.
             11.
             4.
             
             Incipe
             :
             virendi
             rect●
             qui
             prorogat
             ho
             〈…〉
             ,
             Rusticus
             expectat
             dum
             defluat
             anmis
             :
             at
             ille
             Labitur
             ,
             &
             labetur
             in
             omne
             volubilis
             aeuum
             .
             Horat
             .
             l.
             1.
             cp
             .
             2.
             
          
           
             f
             Psal.
             95.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             Hebr.
             3.
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             11.
             
             &
             4.
             7.
             
          
           
             g
             Psal.
             81.
             8
             ,
             13.
             
          
           
             h
             2
             Cor.
             6.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             i
             1
             Tim
             6.
             19.
             
          
           
             k
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             1
             Tim.
             6.
             12.
             
          
           
             l
             Rom.
             8.
             38
             ,
             39.
             
          
           
             m
             Quia
             in
             eo
             qui
             testatur
             ,
             cius
             temporis
             quo
             testamentum
             facit
             ,
             integritas
             mentis
             exigitur
             .
             Digest
             .
             l.
             28.
             tit
             .
             1.
             l.
             2
             Et
             Cod.
             Iust.
             l.
             6.
             tit
             .
             22.
             l.
             9.
             
             Sancimus
             tale
             testamen●ū
             hominis
             ,
             qui
             in
             ipso
             actu
             testandi
             aduersa
             vasetudine
             t
             〈…〉
             us
             est
             ,
             pro
             nihilo
             esse
             .
          
           
             n
             Surdus
             &
             mutus
             testamentū
             fa●ere
             non
             potest
             :
             sed
             si
             qu●s
             post
             testamētum
             factum
             ,
             valetudine
             aut
             quolibet
             alio
             casu
             talu
             esse
             ceperit
             ,
             ratum
             nihilominus
             permanet
             testamentum
             Digest
             .
             〈◊〉
             ,
             28.
             ●●t
             .
             1.
             l
             6.
             
             Q●od
             ment●
             sana
             factum
             est
             ,
             stat
             testamentum
             ,
             etiam
             si
             furor
             mox
             sec●tus
             fu●rit
             .
             Cod.
             Iust.
             l.
             6.
             tit
             .
             22.
             l.
             9.
             
          
           
             o
             M●rhus
             〈◊〉
             ●●abilis
             ,
             qui
             〈◊〉
             officiat
             ,
             mentem
             con●utiat
             .
             Se●
             .
             cp
             .
             58.
             
          
           
             p
             Rom.
             5.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             q
             Esai
             ,
             54.
             10.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Respect
             4.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Zaleuc
             .
             leg
             .
             prooem
             .
             St●b
             .
             tom
             .
             2.
             c.
             42.
             
             Ita
             Se●
             ep
             61.
             
             Hoc
             ●nimo
             tibi
             hanc
             epistolam
             scribe
             ,
             tanquam
             cum
             maximè
             scribentem
             m●rs
             eu●●atura
             fit
             .
          
           
             s
             Dic
             tibi
             dormitur●
             ;
             Potes
             non
             expergis●i
             .
             Dic
             experrecto
             ;
             Potes
             non
             dormire
             amplius
             .
             D●c
             exeunti
             ;
             Petes
             non
             reuerti
             .
             Dic
             reuertenti
             ;
             Pates
             non
             exire
             .
             Se●
             .
             cp
             .
             49.
             
          
           
             t
             Act.
             20.
             9.
             
          
           
             u
             1
             Cor.
             10
             31.
             
          
           
             *
             Ob●jt
             repente
             〈◊〉
             .
             Manlius
             Torquatus
             ,
             cum
             in
             coena
             plac●ntam
             appeteret
             ;
             P.
             Quint
             us
             Scapula
             ,
             cum
             apud
             Aqu
             lium
             Gallum
             coenare●
             ;
             D
             〈…〉
             s
             Sauf●ius
             cum
             domi
             s●ae
             pranderet
             P
             〈…〉
             n.
             lib.
             7.
             cap.
             53.
             
             Ier●m
             .
             41.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             x
             Nullis
             evidentibus
             causis
             ob●e●e
             ,
             dū
             calceantur
             matutino
             ,
             duo
             Caesares
             ;
             &c.
             omnes
             vsque
             ndeò
             sani
             atque
             tempestiui
             ,
             vt
             de
             progr●d●endo
             cogitarent
             .
             Pl●
             .
             ibid.
             Particular
             3.
             
             Quando
             .
             Time
             When.
             Branch
             1.
             
             Exposition
             1.
             
          
           
             y
             Cn.
             Bcbius
             ,
             cum
             à
             puero
             hor●e
             quaesisset
             ;
             C.
             Serui●●us
             ,
             cum
             in
             soro
             ad
             tabernam
             flaret
             in
             fratrem
             innixus
             ;
             Bcbi●s
             Iud●x
             dum
             vnd●monium
             differri
             iub●t
             ,
             M.
             Terentius
             dum
             in
             soro
             tabellas
             s●rihi●
             ;
             C.
             Iulius
             Medicus
             ,
             dum
             inungit
             ,
             specillum
             per
             oculos
             ●rabens
             .
             Pliu.
             ibid.
             
          
           
             z
             Risu
             exanimatus
             est
             Philemon
             Co●ius
             .
             Val.
             Max.
             lib.
             9.
             cap
             12.
             
             Terpander
             ficu
             per
             lusum
             in
             esingesta
             .
             Trypho
             .
             antholog
             .
             lib.
             1.
             cap.
             37.
             
             Drus●us
             Claud●j
             Imp.
             sil●us
             pyro
             .
             Sueton.
             Claud.
             cap.
             27.
             
             Mr.
             H.
             Mor●●s
             
               in
               the
               Tennis-court
               with
               the
               racket
               in
               his
               hand
               .
            
          
           
             a
             In
             bona
             canitie
             .
             Gen.
             15.
             15.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             quod
             à
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             distinguitur
             Iob
             15.
             10.
             1
             
             Sam
             12.
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             plus
             est
             quam
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             quam
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             D.
             Ki
             〈…〉
             hi.
             Vide
             D●us
             .
             obs●r●
             l.
             6.
             c.
             13.
             
             Sencctus
             l●ssae
             aetatis
             ,
             non
             f●actae
             nomen
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             26.
             
          
           
             d
             Dis●●dens
             in
             grat●a
             .
             〈◊〉
             in
             Gen.
             15.
             quo
             etiam
             abire
             vid●tur
             C●rysest
             .
             b●m
             .
             37.
             
             &
             Philo
             ,
             Sed
             &
             Hugo
             .
             Boni
             in●p
             ent
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             bonis
             o●eribus
             ;
             &
             implentur
             m●ritis
             operum
             suorum
             .
          
           
             e
             Multa
             ,
             prouecta
             .
             Pet.
             Martyr
             .
             Long●
             ,
             diuturna
             .
             O
             〈◊〉
             .
             Iun.
             Exposition
             2.
             
          
           
             f
             Sicus
             dicimus
             ,
             Bona
             pars
             homini●
             ,
             ●magnap●●s
             Mart.
             Quinqua
             sci
             e●p●st
             〈◊〉
             Zeno
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Laert.
             Sed
             &
             Demosthenes
             .
             Stob
             tom
             .
             2.
             
             ●
             4.
             
          
           
             g
             Placida
             ,
             tranquilla
             .
             Par.
             Prospera
             ac
             〈◊〉
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             Mus●ul
             .
          
           
             h
             Gen.
             15.
             15.
             
          
           
             i
             Integra
             .
             Oleast
             .
             commoda
             .
             Pisc
             ,
             facili
             ,
             bona
             valetudine
             .
             Mart.
             Branch
             ●
             .
             Exposition
             1.
             
             Exposition
             2.
             
          
           
             k
             Morlis
             ,
             doloribꝰ
             ,
             ●uris
             vacua
             .
             Par.
             Point
             .
             Generall
             3.
             
          
           
             l
             Vide
             Obseru
             .
             3
             rat
             .
             2.
             
             &
             Spec.
             2.
             rat
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             m
             Deut.
             34
             7.
             
          
           
             n
             I●sh
             .
             14
             11.
             
             Talis
             &
             Cyrus
             .
             Xenoph
             .
             P●d
             .
             l.
             8.
             
             &
             Metellus
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             
          
           
             o
             Ol●ast
             .
             Par.
             &c.
             
          
           
             p
             Senex
             ,
             satur
             .
          
           
             q
             Plenus
             plenitudine
             eius
             de
             quo
             Ioan.
             1.
             16.
             
             Procop.
             vide
             Hugon
             .
             sup
             .
          
           
             r
             Gen.
             35.
             29.
             1
             
             Chron.
             23.
             1.
             
          
           
             s
             Vt
             non
             appeteret
             vitae
             pr●rogationem
             .
             Oleast
             .
             ●●lu
             .
             M●rt
             .
             &c.
             
          
           
             a
             Psal.
             90.
             10.
             
          
           
             b
             175.
             
             Vers.
             7.
             
          
           
             c
             Enoch
             .
             Gen.
             5.
             24.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Homer
             .
             Odyss
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             e
             Vide
             pl●n
             .
             h●st
             .
             n●t
             .
             lib.
             7.
             c.
             48.
             
             &
             L●cian
             .
             de
             M●●rob
             .
          
           
             f
             Et
             mortuus
             est
             .
             Gen.
             5.
             5
             ,
             8
             ,
             27
             ,
             &c.
             Reason
             1.
             
          
           
             g
             Vitrei
             sumus
             .
             August
             .
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             1.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Qui
             simul
             ossndit
             ad
             fortunam
             frangitur
             .
             Pbaedr
             .
             fab
             .
             72.
             vbicun
             pue
             a●ietaueri●
             ,
             solu●tur
             .
             Sen.
             〈◊〉
             .
             ad
             Marc.
             cap.
             11.
             
          
           
             i
             Hydria
             tandé
             ad
             font●m
             srangitur
             .
             Eccles.
             12.
             6.
             
          
           
             k
             Mors
             obique
             ●e
             exp
             〈…〉
             :
             〈◊〉
             ,
             si
             sapis
             ,
             eam
             vbique
             expectabis
             .
             August
             .
             nom
             .
             despir
             .
             &
             anim
             .
             c.
             51.
             
             Bern.
             m●d●t
             .
             c
             3.
             
             &
             O
             〈…〉
             .
             mor.
             c.
             7.
             
             Se●ibus
             in
             i
             〈…〉
             is
             ,
             ad
             descent
             bus
             in
             msidij●
             est
             .
             Bern.
             de
             〈◊〉
             .
             14.
             
          
           
             l
             E
             〈…〉
             a
             quib●s
             hic
             〈◊〉
             administratur
             ,
             a
             ●ua
             ,
             terra
             ,
             spiri
             〈…〉
             ,
             omnia
             tam
             causae
             viuend●
             sunt
             qua●
             〈◊〉
             ●ortis
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             117.
             
             Non
             ●ibus
             nobis
             ,
             non
             hamor
             ,
             non
             vigilia
             ,
             non
             somnus
             sine
             mensura
             quadam
             〈◊〉
             sunt
             .
             Idem
             quaest
             ,
             nat
             .
             l.
             6.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
             2.
             
             O●or
             ,
             sapor
             ,
             humor
             ,
             c●bus
             ,
             &
             sine
             quibus
             viu●re
             non
             po●es●
             ,
             sunt
             〈…〉
             mini
             morlifera
             .
             Idem
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             11.
             
          
           
             h
             Inter
             v●rios
             casus
             am
             〈…〉
             ꝰ
             .
             Aug●st
             .
             ibid.
             &
             〈◊〉
             .
             28.
             
             Sub
             〈◊〉
             casibus
             quotid
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             ambulamus
             .
          
           
             m
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             d●
             bapt
             .
          
           
             n
             Potio●is
             stilla
             ma●e
             lapsa
             strangulat
             .
             Sen.
             quaest
             nat
             .
             l.
             6
             c.
             2.
             
          
           
             o
             Passus
             inter
             me
             &
             m●rtem
             .
             1
             Sam.
             20.
             3.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Anath
             〈…〉
             〈◊〉
             morteremotus
             Quatuo●
             ,
             &c.
             Iuuen
             14
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Arat.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             D●o
             Prus.
             orat
             .
             74.
             
             E●
             prope
             tam
             letum
             quam
             prape
             cernu
             aquam
             .
             O●d
             .
             Pont.
             l.
             2.
             
             Inter
             v
             〈…〉
             ae
             mortisquevias
             N
             〈…〉
             gracililim●●e
             ducto
             .
             Sen.
             Med
             2.
             
          
           
             q
             ●●ras
             si
             in
             n●uigat●one
             tantum
             existimas
             minimum
             esse
             quo
             mortevita
             diducit●r
             .
             In
             ●mni
             loco
             aeque
             tenue
             interuallum
             est
             .
             Non
             v●●que
             se
             mors
             tam
             prope
             ost●ndit
             ,
             nbique
             tam
             prope
             est
             .
             S●nec
             .
             epist.
             50.
             
             A
             morte
             semp●r
             ●atundem
             absumus
             .
             Quod
             enim
             tempus
             morti
             exemp
             〈…〉
             est
             ?
             a
             quo
             prope
             non
             est
             ,
             parata
             omnibus
             locis
             ,
             omnibus
             mom●ntis
             ?
             Id●m
             epist.
             30.
             
          
           
             r
             Quem
             saepe
             casus
             transit
             ,
             aliquado
             inuenit
             .
             P.
             Syr.
             Circuit
             fatum
             ;
             &
             si
             quem
             diu
             praeterijt
             ,
             rep●rit
             .
             Sen●c
             .
             quaest
             .
             nat
             .
             l.
             6.
             c.
             1.
             
             Mors
             propter
             incertos
             casus
             quotidiè
             imminet
             ;
             propter
             breuitatem
             vitae
             nunquam
             pot●st
             longè
             abesse
             .
             ●●c
             .
             Tuscul.
             l.
             1.
             
             Nemo
             p●riculo
             proximus
             ,
             iutus
             diu
             .
             Cyp.
             nom
             .
             de
             singul
             .
             cler
             .
          
           
             s
             Stygias
             vltrò
             quaerimus
             vndas
             .
             Senec.
             Herc.
             fur
             .
             1.
             
             Plures
             dentibus
             suis
             ,
             quam
             alient
             ensibus
             perierunt
             .
             Vide
             Iun.
             P●ov
             .
             23.
             2.
             
          
           
             t
             Pauci
             ad
             Senectutem
             p●rue●sunt
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             Quota
             pars
             moritur
             tempore
             fati
             ?
             Senec.
             Her●
             .
             O●t
             .
             2.
             2.
             
          
           
             u
             Implet
             dies
             suos
             .
             Esni
             .
             65.
             20.
             
          
           
             x
             Multas
             natura
             mortis
             vias
             aperuit
             :
             multis
             itineribus
             fata
             decurrunt
             .
             Uno
             modo
             nascimur
             :
             multis
             morimur
             .
             Cestius
             .
             Senec.
             controu
             .
             16.
             
             Vnum
             natura
             nobis
             introitum
             ad
             vitam
             dedit
             ,
             exitus
             mul●os
             .
             Senec.
             epist.
             70.
             
             Mille
             modis
             leti
             miseros
             mors
             vn●
             fa●igat
             .
             Sil.
             Theb.
             lib.
             9.
             
          
           
             a
             Casus
             nostros
             .
             nobiscum
             in
             hac
             carne
             por●amus
             .
             Aug.
             hem
             .
             28.
             
             Innumerabilia
             pericula
             in
             ipso
             sunt
             .
             sinu
             .
             Sen.
             quaest
             ,
             uat
             .
             l.
             6.
             c.
             2.
             
          
           
             Reason
             2.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Metrodor
             .
             Stob.
             〈◊〉
             .
             16.
             
          
           
             c
             Vitrei
             sum●
             .
             Aug.
             sup
             .
          
           
             d
             Si
             vitrei
             essemus
             ,
             casus
             〈◊〉
             timere
             〈…〉
             s.
             Fragiliores
             sumus
             quam
             si
             vitrei
             essemus
             .
             Idemibid
             .
          
           
             e
             Quid
             fragilius
             vase
             vitre●
             ?
             &
             tamen
             seruatur
             &
             durat
             per
             secula
             ;
             &
             inuenis
             calices
             ab
             auis
             &
             proauis
             reliotos
             ,
             in
             quibus
             bibunt
             nepot●s
             &
             pronepotes
             .
             Etsi
             enim
             casus
             vitreo
             vafi
             timentur
             ,
             se●ectus
             ei
             &
             feb●is
             non
             timotur
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Demost.
             Clem
             Strom.
             l.
             6.
             
             Ipse
             situ
             &
             otio
             in
             tabem
             iturus
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             11.
             
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Apollodor
             .
             Donat.
             ad
             illud
             Ter.
             Phorm
             .
             4.
             1.
             
             Senectus
             ipsa
             morbus
             est
             .
          
           
             h
             Senectus
             insanabilis
             morbus
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             10●
             .
             Senectus
             m●rbus
             mgens
             .
             Nullis
             arcerive
             potest
             ,
             pellive
             medelis
             .
             Erasm.
             desen
             .
          
           
             i
             Ista
             vita
             morbus
             est
             .
          
           
             l
             Morieris
             ,
             non
             quia
             aegrotas
             ,
             sed
             quia
             viuis
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             78.
             
          
           
             m
             Medici
             ,
             cum
             aegrotos
             inuisunt
             ,
             phthisicus
             est
             ,
             inquiunt
             ,
             aut
             bydrop●cus
             ,
             moriatur
             necesse
             est
             :
             deinde
             moritur
             tamen
             .
             Aug.
             ibid.
             
          
           
             k
             Morbus
             hic
             necesse
             est
             vt
             ad
             m●rtem
             perducat
             .
             Aug.
             de
             temp
             .
             74.
             
          
           
             n
             Mu
             〈…〉
             morte●
             m●●bus
             d
             〈…〉
             lit
             .
             S●●
             .
             ib
             :
             l.
             
          
           
             o
             Psal
             89.
             48.
             
          
           
             p
             Vt
             Psal.
             49.
             
             〈◊〉
             .
          
           
             q
             Totus
             ist
             us
             vitae
             〈…〉
             rsus
             n●●●l
             aliud
             quam
             ad
             mortem
             de
             ●ursus
             est
             .
             Aug.
             Ciuit.
             l.
             13
             c
             10.
             ●ola
             vita
             ad
             mor●●m
             iter
             est
             .
             Sen.
             ad
             Polyb
             .
             c.
             30.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             EI
             Delph
             .
             Agunt
             opus
             suum
             sata
             :
             nobis
             sensum
             nostrae
             necis
             auferunt
             .
             Quoque
             facilius
             obrepat
             mors
             ,
             subipso
             vi●ae
             nomine
             lat●t
             .
             Infantiam
             ins●
             pueritia
             conuertit
             ,
             pu●ritia
             〈…〉
             pub●rtas
             ,
             〈…〉
             ntututem
             senectus
             abstulit
             .
             S●n.
             M
             〈…〉
             c.
             c.
             10.
             
          
           
             s
             Quotid
             è
             morimur
             :
             qu●t
             commutamur
             .
             Hieron
             .
             Nepot
             .
             Quot
             .
             mor.
             quotidit
             d●mi●ur
             a
             〈…〉
             qua
             pars
             vitae
             .
             Seu.
             ep
             .
             24.
             
          
           
             t
             Ad
             mortem
             dies
             e●tre●us
             p●ruenit
             ,
             a●ced●t
             omnis
             ,
             ●arpit
             nos
             ii
             ,
             non
             corripit
             .
             Non
             repen●●
             nos
             in
             mortem
             incid
             〈…〉
             ,
             sed
             minutatim
             procedi●us
             minutatim
             subducimur
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             24.
             
             &
             30.
             
             &
             120.
             
          
           
             u
             Nasce●tes
             mo
             〈…〉
             w
             ;
             finisque
             borigine
             peudet
             .
             Manil.
             l.
             4
             exquo
             primu●
             lucem
             vidit
             ,
             〈…〉
             r
             mortis
             ingressus
             est
             .
             Sen.
             M●rc
             .
             cap.
             20.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             Plut.
             de
             EI.
             
          
           
             x
             Momentis
             singulis
             moximur
             .
             August
             .
             nom
             .
             ●●dit
             .
             cap.
             24.
             
             Qu●d
             〈…〉
             aliud
             singulis
             momentis
             agitur
             ,
             donec
             ea
             cons
             〈…〉
             mata
             mors
             quae
             agebatur
             impleatur
             ,
             &c.
             August
             .
             Ci●it
             .
             lib.
             13.
             cap.
             10.
             
          
           
             y
             I
             〈…〉
             ipsa
             ,
             si
             bene
             comsutes
             ,
             damna
             sunt
             .
             Et
             illi
             ipsi
             qui
             addebantur
             adol●s●entiae
             anni
             ,
             vitae
             detrahcbantur
             .
             Sen.
             Marc.
             cap.
             20.
             
             Cum
             cressunt
             puers
             ,
             quasi
             accedunt
             illis
             dies
             ,
             cum
             reuerá
             decedant
             .
             Quicquid
             enim
             vixit
             ,
             de
             summa
             minuit
             .
             Qua●do
             prodi
             .
             citur
             〈◊〉
             non
             aug●tur
             ,
             nec
             addendo
             crescit
             ,
             quia
             veniendo
             recedit
             .
             August
             .
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             1.
             
             &
             17.
             ●o●
             .
             1.
             〈◊〉
             de
             temp
             .
             113.
             
             Ipsa
             suis
             augmentis
             vita
             ad
             detrimenta
             impellitur
             ;
             &
             inde
             deficit
             ,
             vnde
             proficere
             creditur
             .
             Greg.
             Mor.
             l.
             13.
             c.
             27.
             
             Illa
             eadem
             vitam
             quae
             inchoat
             ,
             bora
             ●apit
             .
             Camil.
             epitaph
             .
             Et
             〈…〉
             psit
             bora
             vitam
             prima
             quae
             dedit
             .
             Sen.
             Her●
             .
             fur
             .
             3.
             3.
             
          
           
             z
             Quemadmodum
             Clepsydram
             non
             extremum
             stillicidium
             exbaur
             .
             〈◊〉
             ,
             sed
             quicquid
             ante
             destuxit
             :
             sic
             vllima
             h●ra
             ,
             qua
             esse
             des
             〈…〉
             nus
             ,
             non
             sola
             mortem
             facit
             ,
             sed
             sola
             confummat
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             2●
             .
          
           
             Vse
             1.
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isocr
             .
             ad
             Demon
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             in
             Epicur
             .
          
           
             b
             Eccles
             3.
             22.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Archin
             .
             Clem.
             Strom.
             l.
             6.
             
             Omnes
             ●odem
             cogimur
             :
             omni●m
             Versatur
             vrná
             serius
             ●cyus
             Sors
             exitura
             ,
             &c.
             
             Horat.
             carm
             .
             2.
             3.
             
             Vse
             2.
             
          
           
             d
             2
             Sam.
             14.
             14.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antholog
             .
             Debemur
             m●rti
             nos
             nostraque
             :
             Horat
             .
             art
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             E●rip
             .
             Alcest
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             
          
           
             e
             Morte
             nihil
             ●ertius
             .
             Be●n
             .
             epist.
             10.
             &
             medit
             .
             c
             3.
             
          
           
             f
             Hebr.
             9.
             27.
             
          
           
             g
             Incerta
             omnia
             :
             sola
             mors
             certa
             est
             .
             August
             .
             in
             Psalm
             .
             38.
             &
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             21.
             
          
           
             h
             Quid
             diu
             est
             ,
             vbi
             finis
             est
             ?
             Aug.
             d●
             verb.
             Dem
             42.
             
             Quicquid
             finitur
             parum
             est
             .
             Greg.
             Moral
             .
             lib.
             7.
             c.
             20.
             
             Nulla
             longa
             mora
             est
             eius
             ,
             quod
             aliquando
             e
             〈…〉
             ict
             .
             T
             〈…〉
             tull
             .
             Mihi
             ne
             〈…〉
             turnuni
             quidem
             qu●cquam
             videtur
             ,
             in
             quo
             est
             aliquid
             extremum
             .
             Cic.
             de
             s●n
             .
             &
             Aug.
             ciui●
             .
             l.
             12.
             c.
             11.
             
          
           
             i
             Si
             nongentos
             vitae
             excede●
             〈◊〉
             annos
             ,
             vt
             ante
             dil●●ium
             viu●b●t●r
             ,
             &
             Math●
             sal●m
             nobis
             tempora
             donarentur
             ,
             tamen
             nihil
             esset
             praeterita
             longitudo
             ,
             quae
             esse
             desisset
             .
             Et
             〈…〉
             inter
             eu●
             qui
             de●em
             vixit
             annos
             &
             eum
             qui
             mille
             ,
             post
             quamid●m
             vitae
             sinis
             aduenerit
             ,
             &c.
             tra●sactum
             omne
             tantundem
             est
             .
             Hier.
             in
             Nepot
             .
          
           
             k
             Psal.
             90.
             4.
             
          
           
             l
             Quarta
             pars
             nectis
             .
          
           
             m
             1
             Tim.
             6.
             7.
             
             Iob.
             1.
             21.
             
             E●cl●s
             .
             5.
             14.
             
             Nihil
             intulis●i
             ,
             ni●il
             hinc
             auferes
             .
             Aug.
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             5.
             
             &
             41.
             
             E
             〈…〉
             red●untem
             natura
             ,
             sicut
             intrantem
             .
             Non
             licet
             plus
             inferre
             quam
             intuleris
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             102.
             
          
           
             n
             Psal.
             49.
             17.
             
             Cedes
             co●mptis
             salt●bus
             ,
             &
             do
             〈…〉
             ,
             Villique
             ;
             &
             extructin
             al●um
             D
             〈…〉
             poti
             〈…〉
             .
             Linquenda
             ●●llus
             ,
             &
             d●mus
             ,
             &
             placeus
             vxor
             :
             ●eq
             harum
             ,
             qu
             〈…〉
             s
             ,
             a
             borum
             te
             pr●ter
             〈◊〉
             cup
             ●ss●s
             vlla
             breuem
             d
             〈…〉
             seq
             〈…〉
             tur
             .
             Horat.
             car
             .
             23
             &
             14
             
          
           
             o
             P●ou
             .
             23.
             6
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Ch●yso●
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             5.
             ser.
             18.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             19.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Lucian
             .
             anthol
             .
             lib.
             1.
             c.
             p.
             13.
             
             Finem
             sunt
             habitura
             ,
             aut
             tuum
             ,
             aut
             suum
             .
             Bern.
             de
             bon
             .
             deser
             .
             Et
             Sen.
             quaest
             .
             nat
             .
             l.
             3.
             
             Aut
             p●ssi●ent●m
             des●ru●●
             ,
             aut
             à
             possidente
             d●seruntur
             .
             Al●uin
             .
             in
             Eccles
             .
             praef
             .
          
           
             q
             Ps●l
             .
             62.
             10.
             
             Sap●●ns
             d●uitias
             non
             in
             animum
             ,
             sed
             in
             domum
             recipiet
             .
             Sen.
             de
             b●at
             .
             c.
             21.
             
          
           
             r
             Coloss.
             3
             2.
             
          
           
             s
             Omniaista
             nobis
             acceda●t
             ,
             non
             adhaereant
             ;
             vt
             si
             abducantur
             ,
             sine
             vlla
             nostra
             ●acerationed
             d●s●edant
             .
             Sen
             ep
             .
             74.
             
          
           
             t
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             u
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Basil.
             Caes.
             hom
             .
             7.
             
          
           
             x
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antipho
             .
             S●●b
             .
             c.
             10.
             
             Quibu●
             〈◊〉
             p
             〈…〉
             sua
             obhaesit
             ,
             sine
             sensu
             au●lli
             non
             potest
             .
             Sen.
             de
             tranq
             .
             cap.
             8.
             
          
           
             y
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Hesiod
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aesop.
             fab
             .
             Quis
             vitam
             non
             vult
             ?
             Aug.
             hom
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             b
             1
             Tim.
             6.
             19.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aeterna
             vita
             ,
             veravita
             .
             Aug.
             de
             pec
             .
             mer.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             11.
             vera
             vita
             quae
             animam
             de
             morte
             eruit
             .
             Idem
             ep
             .
             121.
             c.
             2.
             
             Uita
             si
             diligitur
             ,
             ibi
             acquiratur
             ,
             〈◊〉
             nulla
             morte
             f
             〈…〉
             r.
             Idem
             ep
             .
             45.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Eurip
             .
             Hanc
             esse
             morsem
             quā
             〈…〉
             s
             vita●
             du●imus
             ,
             vitam
             il-Vse
             3.
             lam
             quam
             pro
             morte
             nos
             f●rmidamus
             .
             Lactant.
             instit
             .
             l.
             3.
             6.
             18.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip
             .
             Ista
             v●●que
             quae
             tantum
             amatur
             vita
             ,
             quamlibet
             iucūda
             asque
             prodicta
             sit
             ,
             nec
             vita
             d●cēda
             est
             .
             Aug.
             ep
             .
             121.
             
             Vita
             falsa
             est
             .
             Idem
             de
             verb.
             Dom.
             5.
             hom
             .
             13.
             et
             de
             temp
             212.
             
          
           
             d
             Quod
             de
             arc●●
             Herac●●t
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eustath
             .
             ad
             I●ad
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             ad
             Apollen
             .
          
           
             e
             Mors
             est
             potius
             d●cenda
             quam
             〈…〉
             a
             ,
             vel
             mortis
             quaedam
             pro●xitas
             .
             Gr●g
             .
             in
             Euang.
             36.
             
             Hae●
             vita
             qu●
             v
             〈…〉
             ꝰ
             ,
             magis
             mors
             est
             ,
             &c.
             Bern.
             in
             Psal.
             90.
             ser.
             17.
             
          
           
             f
             Luk.
             12.
             15
             ,
             22.
             
          
           
             g
             De
             Acragan●●●is
             Empedo●●●s
             ;
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Lac●t
             .
             l.
             8.
             
             De
             Rhodijs
             Stratonicus
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             auar
             .
             Ideque
             ferè
             de
             Megarensibꝰ
             Diogenes
             .
             Tertul
             apolog
             .
          
           
             h
             Esai
             .
             5.
             8.
             
          
           
             i
             Jer.
             22.
             14
             ,
             15.
             
          
           
             k
             Eccles
             .
             4.
             8.
             
          
           
             l
             Psal.
             49.
             11.
             
          
           
             m
             Luk.
             12.
             15.
             
          
           
             n
             Psal.
             49
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9.
             
          
           
             o
             Prou.
             11.
             4.
             
             Ezck
             7.
             19.
             
          
           
             p
             Eccles.
             5.
             17.
             
          
           
             q
             Eccles.
             4.
             8.
             
          
           
             r
             Psal.
             39.
             6.
             
          
           
             s
             Psal.
             49.
             17.
             
             Eccles.
             5.
             15.
             
          
           
             t
             Ier.
             17.
             11.
             
             Luk.
             12.
             20.
             
          
           
             u
             L
             〈…〉
             s.
             5.
             16.
             
             &
             6.
             2
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             x
             Psal.
             39.
             6.
             
             Eccl.
             6.
             2.
             
          
           
             y
             Eccl.
             2.
             18
             ,
             19.
             
          
           
             a
             S●ultum
             est
             timere
             ,
             quod
             vitari
             non
             potest
             .
             P.
             Syr.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Arrian
             .
             1.
             
             Epict.
             l.
             1.
             c.
             27.
             
          
           
             Vse
             4.
             
          
           
             b
             Differri
             potest
             ,
             auserri
             non
             potest
             .
             Aug.
             de
             diuers
             .
             36.
             
             Mortem
             differunt
             ista
             ,
             non
             au●●runt
             .
             Idem
             de
             verb.
             Apost
             .
             ●8
             .
          
           
             c
             Sed
             etsi
             tardius
             quis
             moritur
             ,
             nunquid
             ideò
             non
             moritur
             ?
             Idē
             de
             temp
             .
             74.
             
          
           
             d
             Quid
             autem
             ad
             rem
             pertinet
             ,
             quadiu
             vites
             ,
             quod
             euitare
             non
             possis
             ?
             Sen.
             epist.
             93.
             
          
           
             e
             Noli
             timere
             ,
             quod
             velis
             ,
             ●olis
             ,
             e
             〈…〉
             :
             id
             time
             ,
             quod
             ,
             si
             nelueris
             ,
             non
             erit
             .
             Aug.
             de
             diuers
             .
             36.
             
          
           
             f
             De
             hoc
             verè
             dici
             potest
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aristot
             .
             Ethic.
             l.
             3.
             c.
             6.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ep
             〈…〉
             .
             La●rt
             .
             Timor●m
             maximus
             leti
             metus
             .
             Lucan
             .
             ●b
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             g
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             Chrysost.
             tom
             .
             6.
             serm
             .
             43.
             
          
           
             h
             Persona
             〈◊〉
             deformis
             〈◊〉
             ●um
             facit
             .
             Sen.
             de
             constant
             .
             sap
             .
             cap
             4.
             
             Laruam
             timent
             ,
             lucernam
             non
             timent
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Arrian
             .
             Epict.
             d
             〈…〉
             t.
             l.
             b.
             1.
             cap.
             5.
             
          
           
             i
             Esse
             aliquos
             manes
             ,
             &c.
             Nec
             pueri
             credunt
             ,
             nisi
             qui
             nondum
             ●relauantur
             .
             Iu●enal
             .
             Sat.
             2.
             
             Nemo
             tam
             p●e●
             e
             〈…〉
             ,
             vt
             ista
             ●●meat
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             24.
             
          
           
             Point
             .
             Speciall
             1.
             
          
           
             k
             Gen.
             15.
             15.
             
          
           
             l
             1
             Sam.
             2.
             32.
             
          
           
             m
             Exod.
             20.
             12.
             
             Ephes
             .
             62.
             
             Deut.
             4.
             1
             ,
             40.
             
             &
             6
             2.
             
          
           
             n
             Esai
             .
             65.
             20.
             
          
           
             o
             Potest
             &
             verti
             ,
             ex
             eis
             ,
             vt
             ad
             vtrūque
             tam
             infantulū
             quam
             senem
             ,
             r●●eratur
             illud
             ,
             Qui
             n●
             impleat
             dies
             suos
             ,
             quod
             &
             Piscatori
             placet
             ;
             ●iue
             ,
             cuius
             dies
             Deus
             non
             impleat
             ,
             vt
             Iun.
             
          
           
             p
             Viuendi
             sinis
             est
             optimus
             ,
             cum
             integra
             mente
             caeter
             .
             sque
             sensibus
             op
             〈…〉
             .
             〈…〉
             sa
             suum
             eadem
             ,
             〈◊〉
             coagmentau●●
             ,
             〈…〉
             tura
             d●ssoluit
             .
             〈◊〉
             de
             sen.
             
          
           
             q
             Vise
             ●is
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Esai
             .
             65.
             
             Greg.
             Mor.
             l.
             1●
             .
             c.
             24.
             
             Hug.
             Card.
             &
             Piscat
             .
             in
             Esai
             .
             &c.
             Hinc
             emanauit
             Prouerbium
             ,
             Puer
             centum
             annorum
             .
             Quod
             mirum
             est
             Drusium
             non
             aduert●sse
             a●
             hoc
             loco
             ,
             sed
             perpera●
             accept●
             ,
             mutuatum
             .
          
           
             r
             Iob
             15.
             32
             ,
             33.
             
          
           
             s
             Die
             non
             s●o
             ,
             i.
             quem
             per
             naturam
             attinger●
             pote●at
             .
             Ita
             Firm.
             l.
             8.
             c.
             19.
             ●rit
             longaeuus
             ,
             in
             senecta
             soelix
             ,
             &
             qui
             sua
             ●or●e
             moriatur
             .
             Et
             de
             C●s●r●s
             percussoribus
             Sueton
             .
             Nemo
             sua
             mor.
             Reason
             1.
             ●●d
             functus
             est
             .
             Et
             Sen.
             ●p
             .
             69.
             
             Alioqui
             certū
             est
             quod
             ibid.
             Sen.
             Nemo
             nisi
             suo
             d●e
             moritur
             .
          
           
             t
             Psal.
             55.
             23.
             
          
           
             u
             In
             medio
             dierum
             suorum
             tolletur
             ,
             vt
             Psal.
             ●02
             .
             24.
             
          
           
             a
             Leuit.
             19.
             32.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Reason
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Phocylid
             .
          
           
             b
             Hebr.
             13.
             4.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plato
             leg
             .
             l
             9.
             
             Apud
             antiquissimos
             Romanorum
             ,
             neque
             generi
             ,
             neque
             pecuniae
             praestan●●or
             honos
             trib●●
             quam
             aetati
             solitus
             :
             maioresque
             natu
             à
             minoribus
             colebantur
             ad
             deum
             prope
             &
             parentum
             vicem
             ;
             atque
             in
             omni
             loco
             ,
             inque
             omni
             spec●●
             honoris
             potiores
             prioresque
             habiti
             .
             Gell.
             l
             2.
             c.
             15.
             
             Senect
             〈…〉
             〈…〉
             uentus
             ita
             cumulatum
             &
             circumspectum
             honorem
             reddebat
             ,
             tanquam
             maiores
             nat●
             adolescentium
             communes
             ●atres
             essent
             .
             Val.
             Max.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             1.
             
             Magna
             ●uit
             quondam
             capitis
             reuerentia
             cani
             .
             Quid
             fast
             .
             l.
             5.
             
             Credehant
             tunc
             grandenesas
             ,
             &
             morte
             pian●um
             ,
             Si
             v●tul●
             Iuuenis
             non
             assurrexerat
             .
             Iuuen.
             sat
             .
             13.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &c.
             Clem.
             Paedag.
             l.
             3
             〈◊〉
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             e
             Dan.
             7.
             13.
             
          
           
             f
             Prou.
             20.
             29.
             
          
           
             g
             Prou.
             16.
             31.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             sen.
             polit
             .
          
           
             i
             Psal.
             128.
             1.
             
          
           
             k
             Psal.
             128.
             6.
             
          
           
             l
             Iob
             42.
             16.
             
             Reason
             3.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Alcest
             .
          
           
             m
             In
             ●tatis
             flore
             morientur
             .
             〈◊〉
             Sam.
             2.
             23.
             
             Hinc
             illa
             qu●Reason
             4.
             rela
             ,
             Immaturu●●bij●
             .
             Senec.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             20.
             
             Dol●●
             illū
             immatura
             morte
             indignissimè
             raptum
             Pl●●
             .
             l.
             6.
             ep
             .
             6.
             
          
           
             n
             Nullum
             non
             acerbum
             funus
             est
             ,
             quod
             parens
             sequitur
             .
             Sen.
             ibid.
             c.
             17.
             
             Quod
             decuit
             natū
             patri
             praestar●
             sepulto
             ;
             Hoc
             contra
             nato
             praestitit
             ipse
             paren●
             .
             Epitaph
             .
             Olim
             parentū
             defunctorum
             liberi
             laudes
             dicebant
             .
             En
             rerum
             in
             nobis
             ordo
             mutatus
             est
             ;
             &
             in
             calamitatem
             nostrā
             perdidit
             sua
             iura
             natura
             .
             Quod
             exhibere
             senibus
             i●uenis
             debuit
             ,
             hoc
             iuueni
             exhibemu●
             senes
             .
             Hieron
             .
             ad
             Nepot
             .
          
           
             o
             Act.
             5.
             41.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Elegantissimum
             oxymorum
             .
             Casaub
             .
             S●
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Phil.
             1.
             29.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ignat.
             ep
             .
             12.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Idem
             ep
             .
             11.
             
             Est
             &
             confusionis
             gloria
             ,
             &
             confusio
             gloriosa
             .
             Ambr.
             in
             Psal.
             43
             Hac
             tempestate
             (
             D●o●l●tiano
             ●●uiente
             )
             certat
             〈◊〉
             in
             glo
             〈…〉
             sa
             certamina
             ruebatur
             ,
             multoque
             auidius
             martyria
             gloriosis
             mortibus
             quaerebantur
             ,
             quam
             ●unc
             Epis●opatus
             ●●auis
             ambi●ionibus
             appetuntur
             .
             Seuer
             .
             hist.
             l.
             2.
             
             Rom.
             5.
             5.
             
             Intribulationibus
             glorian●●r
             ,
             contum
             〈…〉
             gloriam
             reputantes
             ,
             opprobrium
             gaudium
             ,
             d●spectionem
             exaltationem
             .
             Bern.
             de
             temp
             .
             71.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Clem.
             p●d
             .
             l
             3.
             c.
             3.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ibid.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             P
             〈…〉
             .
             O●
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             I
             〈…〉
             Beller
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Soph.
             O●dip
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             P
             〈…〉
             .
             paedag
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Idem
             de
             sen.
             polit
             .
             Non
             omnia
             grandi●r
             aetas
             Quae
             fugiam●●
             habe●
             :
             seris
             venit
             vsus
             abannis
             .
             Quid.
             Met.
             l.
             6.
             
             Quisquis
             adsapientiam
             peruenit
             ,
             annis
             peruenit
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             69.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Hippolyt
             .
          
           
             q
             Iob
             32.
             4
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
             Philē
             .
             9.
             
             Apex
             se●ectutis
             est
             aut
             ●ritas
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sea
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Plut
             desen
             .
             Senatus
             ergo
             à
             senib
             〈…〉
             Hin
             〈…〉
             A
             〈…〉
             stus
             ,
             Aud●te
             iuuenes
             sen●m
             ,
             quem
             audiuere
             iu●en●m
             s●nes
             .
             Ibid.
             Point
             .
             Sp●ciall
             2.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Reason
             I.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sclcrias
             S●ob
             .
             cap.
             101.
             
             Scolio●
             hoc
             citat
             &
             Pl●●o
             in
             Gorg.
             &
             A
             〈…〉
             ot
             .
             Rhet.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             22
             Sed
             &
             Plat.
             leg
             .
             l.
             1.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             E●
             ibid.
             l.
             2.
             idem
             ferè
             babet
             .
             Quin
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Deliacamcitat
             Aristot.
             Ethi●
             .
             Nicom
             .
             l
             〈◊〉
             .
             c.
             8.
             
             &
             Eadem
             l.
             1.
             c.
             1.
             quá
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             dicitur
             .
             Senar
             .
             Grae.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             i.
             mens
             sana
             in
             corpore
             sano
             .
             Iuuen.
             sat
             .
             10.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Plato
             Gorg.
             
          
           
             s
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ▪
             Plut.
             de
             sanit
             .
             &
             de
             tranq
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ifidor
             .
             Pel
             :
             l
             :
             3.
             ep
             .
             192.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Ariphron
             .
             Athen.
             lib
             vlt.
             
          
           
             t
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Hera
             〈…〉
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Basil.
             Caes
             ,
             hom
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             Quid
             boni
             hav●at
             sanitas
             ,
             languor
             ostendit
             .
             Hier.
             n.
             consol
             .
             Pa
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             u
             Eccles.
             12.
             1.
             
             ●8
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Reason
             2.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antiph
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             I●●
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Bion.
             I●ert
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             O●nom
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Glauc
             .
             Objicit
             innumeris
             c●rp●s
             lacerabile
             morbis
             .
             Auson
             .
             idyl
             .
             15.
             circumsilit
             agmi
             〈…〉
             sacto
             Morborum
             omne
             genus
             .
             Iuuen.
             sat
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             x
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             :
             Onus
             Aetna
             grauius
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Eurip.
             Bacch
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Pherecrat
             .
          
           
             y
             Plena
             ●st
             voluptatis
             senectus
             ,
             fi
             illa
             scias
             vti
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             12.
             
             His
             mihi
             rebus
             le●is
             est
             s●nectus
             ;
             nec
             solum
             non
             mol●sta
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             iucunda
             .
             Cato
             .
             Q●●d
             est
             enim
             iu●undius
             senectute
             stipata
             stud
             〈…〉
             t
             is
             ?
             ●ic
             .
             de
             sen.
             
          
           
             z
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Eurip.
             Peleo
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plu●
             .
             de
             sen.
             pol.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Menand
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Ione
             .
             Non
             sentio
             in
             animo
             〈…〉
             is
             iniuriani
             ,
             cum
             sentiam
             in
             corpore
             .
             Vigetanimus
             :
             illius
             flos
             senectus
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             26.
             —
             nec
             tarda
             senectus
             Debilitat
             vires
             animi
             ,
             mentis●ue
             vigorem
             .
             Virg.
             Aen.
             lib.
             9.
             
          
           
             a
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plu●
             .
             de
             sen.
             pol.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Melamp
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             B●o●
             .
             La●r
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Sophocl
             .
             Thyest.
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antiphan
             .
             Philoct
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip
             .
             A●tiop
             .
             Polyb.
             lib.
             1.
             
             Plut.
             de
             sen.
             Pol.
             Galen
             .
             de
             art
             .
             Stob.
             〈◊〉
             .
             52.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Oppian
             .
             pisc
             .
             l.
             5.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Agatho
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Menand
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Gabr.
             Fab.
             Hinc
             Agamemnon
             decem
             Nestores
             potius
             quam
             Aiaces
             optat
             .
             Iliad
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             Plut.
             de
             sen.
             pol.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Aristoph
             .
             vesp
             .
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pl●t
             .
             ibid.
             Non
             proprium
             senectutis
             est
             vit●um
             ,
             sed
             commune
             valetudinis
             .
             Cic.
             de●en
             .
          
           
             d
             Iob
             7.
             15
             ,
             20.
             
             Nunc
             quia
             longa
             mihi
             grauis
             est
             &
             inutilis
             aetas
             ,
             viuere
             cum
             nequeam
             ,
             sit
             mihi
             posse
             mori
             .
             Maxim.
             eleg
             ,
             1.
             
          
           
             f
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Menand
             .
             Tum
             equidem
             in
             senecta
             hoc
             depuso
             miserrimum
             ,
             Sentire
             ea
             aetate
             esse
             odi●sum
             alteri
             .
             Caecil
             .
             Vsque
             adeo
             grauis
             vx●ri
             ,
             natisque
             ,
             sibique
             ,
             Vt
             captatori
             moueat
             fastidia
             Cosso
             .
             Iuuen.
             10.
             
          
           
             g
             Quosdam
             subit
             eadem
             videndi
             saciendique
             sati●tas
             ,
             &
             vitae
             non
             odium
             ,
             sed
             fastidium
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             24.
             
          
           
             e
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ;
             Eurip.
             Menalip
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Soph.
             S●yr
             .
          
           
             h
             Habet
             enim
             natura
             ,
             vt
             aliarum
             omnium
             rerum
             ,
             sic
             viuendi
             modū
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             
          
           
             i
             Vixi
             quantum
             satis
             er
             at
             :
             mortem
             plenus
             expecto
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             62.
             
          
           
             k
             Gen.
             35.
             29.
             
          
           
             l
             Iob
             42.
             17.
             
          
           
             m
             2
             Chron.
             24.
             15.
             
          
           
             n
             1
             Chron.
             23.
             1.
             
          
           
             o
             1
             Chron.
             29.
             28.
             
             Reason
             1.
             
          
           
             p
             Omnino
             rerū
             omnium
             satietas
             vitae
             facit
             satietatem
             .
             Vitae
             autem
             satietas
             tempus
             maturum
             mortis
             assert
             .
             Cic.
             de
             sen.
             
          
           
             q
             Luke
             2.
             26.
             
          
           
             r
             Luke
             2.
             29
             ,
             30.
             
          
           
             s
             Gen.
             37.
             33
             ,
             35.
             
             &
             42
             36
             ,
             38.
             
          
           
             t
             Gen.
             46.
             30.
             
          
           
             u
             Gen.
             48.
             11.
             
          
           
             a
             Sunt
             pueritiae
             certa
             stud●a
             ;
             sunt
             &
             ineuntis
             adol●scentiae
             ;
             sunt
             &
             cōstantis
             aetatis
             ;
             sunt
             &
             extremae
             sene-Reason
             2.
             ctutis
             :
             istaergò
             〈…〉
             occidunt
             ,
             fit
             vitae
             sa
             〈…〉
             ,
             〈◊〉
             .
             desen
             .
          
           
             b
             Non
             acerbum
             iam
             iudicant
             viuere
             ,
             sed
             supersluum
             .
             Senec.
             epist.
             24.
             
          
           
             c
             Act
             13.
             36.
             
          
           
             d
             Philip.
             1.
             24
             ,
             25.
             
             Ita
             Martinus
             decumbens
             ;
             Domine
             ,
             si
             adhuc
             populo
             tuo
             sum
             necessarius
             ,
             nō
             recuso
             laborem
             ,
             &c.
             
             Seuer
             .
             epist.
             3.
             
             &
             B●rn
             .
             ser.
             de
             Mart.
             
          
           
             e
             Act.
             20.
             24.
             
          
           
             Vse
             1.
             
          
           
             f
             Psal.
             91.
             16.
             
          
           
             g
             Psal.
             103.
             5.
             
          
           
             h
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             desen
             .
             polit
             .
             &
             de
             vit
             .
             Epicur
             .
             Senectus
             non
             modò
             languida
             &
             iners
             non
             sit
             ,
             verum
             etiam
             sit
             operosa
             ,
             &
             semper
             pro
             eis
             ,
             qua●
             habet
             viribus
             ,
             agens
             aliquid
             &
             moliens
             .
             Cic.
             d●
             sen.
             
          
           
             i
             Cognatasunt
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             v●
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eustath
             .
             Il
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             E●ymolo●
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Pythag.
             l.
             acrt
             .
             Vse
             2.
             
          
           
             k
             Prou.
             16.
             31
             
             Venerabilis
             senectus
             ;
             verum
             virtutum
             ,
             non
             anno●ū
             numero
             computata
             .
             Guil.
             de
             Theodor.
             de
             amor
             .
             Dei.
             c
             9.
             
             Alioqui
             nihil
             turpius
             quam
             grandis
             natu
             senex
             ,
             qui
             nih
             .
             l
             habit
             ,
             quo
             se
             prob●t
             diu
             vixisse
             p●aeter
             aetatē
             .
             Sen.
             de
             t●āq
             .
             c.
             3.
             
             Non
             enim
             cani
             rugae
             que
             ,
             sed
             honeste
             acta
             aeta●
             ,
             autoritatē
             afferunt
             .
             Ci●
             .
             d●sen
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Philo
             antholog
             .
             l
             1.
             c.
             16.
             
          
           
             l
             Es●i
             .
             65.
             
             2●
             .
          
           
             m
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Bion.
             Stob.
             c
             1.
             
             Rarus
             qui
             exacto
             con
             en●us
             tempore
             vitae
             ,
             Cedat
             ,
             vti
             con
             〈…〉
             a
             satur
             .
             Hor.
             sat
             1.
             
             Cur
             non
             vt
             plenus
             vitae
             c●nuiuareced
             s
             Lucret.
             l.
             3.
             
          
           
             n
             Prou
             30.
             13
             ,
             14.
             
             Hab.
             2
             5.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Solon
             .
             Arist.
             polit
             .
             l.
             1.
             c.
             5.
             
             Plut.
             de
             auar
             .
             Basil.
             hom
             .
             24
             Stob.
             c.
             10.
             
             Nemo
             est
             ,
             cui
             foelicita●
             sua
             ,
             etiamsi
             cursu
             veniat
             ,
             satisfaciat
             .
             Seu.
             ep
             .
             115.
             
             Non
             potest
             cupjditatibus
             ,
             etiamsi
             expleatur
             diui
             〈…〉
             .
             Ambr.
             de
             bon
             .
             mort
             .
             c.
             1.
             
             Auarus
             an
             mus
             nullo
             satiatur
             lu●ro
             .
             P.
             Sjr.
             Seu.
             ep
             .
             49.
             
             Fortuna
             multis
             dat
             nimis
             ,
             nulli
             satis
             .
             Martial
             .
             l.
             12.
             ep
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             o
             Deinde
             animi
             ingrati
             naturam
             p
             s●ere
             semper
             ,
             Atque
             explere
             bonis
             rebus
             ,
             satiareque
             numquam
             ;
             Qued
             faciunt
             nobis
             annorum
             temp●ra
             ,
             circum
             Cum
             redeunt
             ,
             foetusque
             serunt
             ,
             variosque
             lepores
             ,
             Nec
             tamen
             explemar
             vita●
             sruct
             .
             bus
             ●nquam
             .
             Lucret.
             l.
             3.
             
          
           
             p
             Hae
             res
             vitae
             me
             ,
             soror
             ,
             saturant
             :
             Hae
             m●hidiuidiae
             &
             s
             〈…〉
             osunt
             .
             Plaut
             .
             Stich.
             1.
             1.
             
          
           
             q
             Taedio
             vitae
             ad
             ●ortem
             curritur
             .
             Epicur
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             24.
             mo●bi
             .
             Plin.
             Sec.
             l.
             3.
             ep
             .
             3.
             
             Liboris
             .
             Cu●t
             .
             l
             5.
             
          
           
             r
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Muson
             .
             Stob.
             c.
             1.
             
             Ill
             〈…〉
             lauda
             &
             imitare
             ,
             quem
             non
             piget
             inor●
             cum
             iuuat
             v●uere
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             54.
             cum
             v●uere
             aceroum
             nō
             si●
             .
             Idem
             ep
             24.
             
          
           
             s
             1
             Chron.
             29.
             28.
             
          
           
             t
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plutarc
             .
             d●
             tranquil
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Idem
             de
             clar
             .
             foem
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Epi●tet
             .
             S●●b
             .
             c.
             120.
             
             Inter
             mortis
             metum
             &
             vitae
             tormenta
             miseri
             fluctuant
             :
             &
             viuere
             no●unt
             ,
             &
             mori
             nes●iunt
             .
             Sen.
             ep
             .
             4.
             
             Pati
             non
             vultis
             ,
             exire
             timetis
             :
             quid
             faciam
             vobis
             ?
             Cypr.
             de
             mortal
             .
          
           
             u
             De
             ●●redico
             Plato
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             tard
             .
             vind
             .
             Quid
             buius
             viuere
             est
             ?
             d●u
             mori
             .
             Sen
             ,
             ep
             .
             101.
             
             Mortis
             habet
             vices
             ,
             Lentè
             cum
             trahitur
             vita
             dolentibus
             .
             Sen.
             Herc.
             O●t
             .
             1.
             2.
             
          
           
             x
             Morsque
             minus
             p
             〈…〉
             nae
             quam
             mor●
             mortis
             habet
             .
             Onid
             .
             ep
             .
             10.
             
          
           
             y
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Homer
             .
             Odys
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Eurip.
             Aulid
             .
             Debilem
             facito
             manu
             ,
             Deb.
             lempede
             ,
             coxa
             :
             Tuber
             adstrue
             gibberum
             ;
             Lubricos
             quate
             dentes
             .
             Vita
             dum
             superest
             ,
             bene
             est
             ,
             Me●aenas
             .
             Quod
             miserrimum
             erat
             ,
             si
             incidisset
             ,
             optatur
             ,
             &
             tanquam
             vitapetitur
             ,
             supplicij
             mora
             .
             Inuenitur
             qui
             malit
             inter
             supplicia
             tabescere
             ,
             &
             perir●
             〈…〉
             mbratim
             ;
             &
             t●ties
             per
             stillicidia
             ●mittere
             animam
             ,
             quam
             semel
             exhalare
             ?
             Inuenitur
             ,
             qui
             velit
             trahere
             〈◊〉
             ●o●
             tormenta
             tracturam
             ?
             Est
             tanti
             habere
             animam
             ,
             ut
             agam
             ?
             Sen.
             epist.
             101.
             
          
           
             *
             Id
             agendum
             est
             ,
             vt
             satis
             vixerimus
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             23.
             
             Vt
             satis
             vixerimus
             ,
             nec
             anni
             ,
             nec
             d●es
             facient
             ,
             sed
             animus
             .
             Idem
             epist.
             62.
             
          
           
             z
             Fastidio
             illis
             esse
             cepit
             vita
             .
             Sen.
             de
             tranq
             .
             〈◊〉
             .
             2.
             
             Est
             etia●
             vitae
             ipsius
             nausea
             quaedam
             .
             Idē
             ep
             .
             24.
             
             Et
             de
             Abr.
             in
             hunc
             locum
             Paraeus
             ,
             Pertaesus
             vitae
             aerumnosae
             .
             Quod
             minus
             buc
             quadr●t
             .
             Particular
             4.
             
             Quo.
             Place
             ,
             Whither
             .
          
           
             a
             Cap.
             15.
             15.
             
          
           
             b
             1
             King.
             2.
             10.
             
             &
             11
             43.
             
             &
             14.
             30.
             
             &
             15.
             8
             ,
             24.
             
          
           
             c
             Gen.
             15.
             15.
             
          
           
             d
             Gen.
             35.
             29.
             
             &
             49.
             33.
             
             Num.
             20.
             24
             ,
             26.
             
             &
             27.
             13.
             
             &
             31.
             2.
             
             Deut.
             32.
             50.
             
          
           
             e
             Act.
             13.
             36.
             
             Point
             .
             Generall
             4.
             
          
           
             f
             Statum
             mortuorum
             in
             genere
             .
             Vnde
             dieu●t
             Hebr.
             Qui
             moritur
             ,
             ambulat
             per
             viam
             ,
             per
             quam
             ambularunt
             patres
             cius
             .
             Oleast
             .
          
           
             g
             Gen.
             3.
             19.
             
             Eccl.
             12.
             7.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Epicha●m
             .
             Ced●●
             enim
             re●rò
             ,
             de
             terra
             quod
             fuit
             an●e
             ,
             In
             terras
             :
             &
             quod
             missum
             est
             ex
             aethor●s
             oris
             ,
             Id
             r
             〈…〉
             sum
             coeli
             rellatum
             templa
             rec●ptant
             .
             Lu●ret
             .
             l.
             2.
             
          
           
             h
             Sic
             hominū
             terra
             ,
             vt
             ●oelum
             De●
             ;
             quae
             nos
             nas●entes
             excipit
             ,
             natos
             abt
             ,
             semelque
             ,
             editos
             sust●net
             s●mper
             ,
             nou●ssime
             ●o●plexa
             gremto
             j●
             a
             reliqua
             natura
             abdicates
             ,
             tū
             maxime
             ,
             vt
             mater
             ,
             operiens
             .
             Plin.
             l.
             2.
             c.
             63.
             
             T●rra
             quae
             dedit
             ,
             ipsa
             capit
             ,
             n●que
             d●spendi
             facit
             hilum
             .
             Haec
             enim
             gentes
             omnes
             pepe●●t
             ,
             &
             r●sum●t
             denuo
             .
             Ennius
             Epithar
             .
             Varro
             deling
             .
             Lat.
             l.
             4.
             capit
             omnia
             tellus
             Quae
             g●nuit
             .
             〈…〉
             can
             .
             l.
             7.
             
          
           
             Reason
             I.
             
          
           
             i
             Act.
             13.
             36.
             
          
           
             k
             Paraeus
             .
          
           
             l
             Gen.
             25.
             9
             ,
             6.
             
          
           
             m
             Psal.
             105.
             11.
             
          
           
             n
             See
             the
             worthie
             Primate
             of
             Armaugh
             Answer
             to
             Iesuites
             Challenge
             ,
             pag.
             291
             &c.
             
          
           
             o
             Omnibus
             natura
             s●pulturam
             dedit
             .
             Nausragos
             idem
             fluctus
             ,
             qu●
             expul●●
             ,
             s●peht
             :
             sussixorum
             corpora
             〈…〉
             bus
             in
             sepulturam
             suam
             d●stuunt
             :
             e●s
             ,
             qui
             v
             〈…〉
             vr●n●ur
             ,
             poena
             sunerat
             .
             Sen.
             controu
             .
             4.
             l.
             8.
             sepelit
             natura
             relictos
             ,
             Me
             〈…〉
             apud
             Sen.
             epist.
             92.
             
          
           
             p
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             q
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Iob
             30.
             23.
             
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Naz.
             ad
             Av●an
             .
             Omniparens
             ,
             eadem
             re●um
             commune
             sepulcrum
             .
             Lucret.
             l.
             5.
             
             Sic
             Ca
             〈…〉
             .
             ad
             Madl
             .
             Tro
             〈…〉
             as
             ,
             commune
             sepul
             rum
             Asiae
             Europaeque
             .
          
           
             r
             Gen●s
             .
             37.
             37.
             
             V●se
             Drus.
             obs●ru
             .
             lib.
             4.
             cap.
             23.
             
             In
             luctu
             permanebo
             donec
             me
             terra
             suscipiat
             ,
             vt
             filium
             meum
             sepulcrum
             〈◊〉
             sus
             〈…〉
             .
             Al●um
             .
             S●pul●ra
             enim
             in
             Scripturae
             locu
             mul●is
             intelliguntur
             ,
             non
             ea
             solum
             quae
             ad
             d
             〈…〉
             nem
             humanorum
             corporum
             videntur
             esse
             constructa
             ,
             vel
             in
             saxis
             excisa
             ,
             aut
             in
             terra
             d●s●ssa
             ;
             sed
             om●●s
             lo●us
             in
             quo●umque
             vel
             integrum
             〈…〉
             pus
             humanum
             ,
             vel
             ex
             par●e
             aliqua
             iacet
             ,
             etia●●si
             〈◊〉
             d●t
             vt
             vnum
             corpus
             per
             loca
             ●●lta
             a●sp
             rsum
             sit
             .
             Origen
             .
             in
             Esai
             .
             lib.
             8.
             
             Euseb.
             apolog
             .
             〈◊〉
             Plin.
             lib.
             7.
             cap.
             54.
             
             Sepultus
             d●citur
             qu●quo
             modo
             conditus
             ;
             humatus
             ,
             humo
             con
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             s
             Gen.
             50.
             13.
             
          
           
             t
             And●
             .
             Caes.
             in
             Apo
             〈…〉
             16
             à
             cambus
             de●oratos
             ,
             conum
             vent●es
             viua
             stpul-Reason
             2.
             
             Generall
             .
             cra
             sortitos
             .
             Qued
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Diogenes
             di
             〈…〉
             it
             .
             Stob.
             c.
             123.
             
             A
             〈…〉
             t
             cadauer
             alites
             ,
             alit
             fera●vivum
             sepulcrum
             mortuo
             sic
             obtigit
             .
             Et
             A●us
             Atreo
             ;
             Natis
             sepuicrum
             est
             ●pse
             pa●es
             .
             Cic.
             offic
             .
             l.
             1.
             
          
           
             u
             Eccles
             3.
             10.
             
          
           
             a
             De
             commun●
             generis
             humani
             (
             quoad
             vitam
             futuram
             )
             societate
             .
             Calu
             〈…〉
             .
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Plut.
             de
             superst●●
             .
             Speciall
             .
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             An
             bo
             〈…〉
             .
             lib.
             3.
             cap.
             6.
             
          
           
             d
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Anár
             .
             in
             Apoc.
             c.
             63.
             
             Dicunt
             animas
             corpore
             liberatas
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             petere
             .
             i.
             licum
             qui
             non
             videtur
             .
             Ambr.
             de
             bon
             .
             mort
             .
             c.
             10.
             
             Vide
             Platon
             .
             in
             Phaedone
             .
          
           
             e
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Qued
             Christian●
             seculum
             futurum
             ,
             Iudaei
             s●c●uum
             animarum
             d●cunt
             .
             Brought
             .
             in
             Symbol
             .
             &
             S●●indler
             .
             lexic.
             Pentaglot
             .
          
           
             f
             Augelum
             tuiis
             simulans
             se
             Satanas
             ,
             non
             Samuel
             .
             Aug.
             ad
             Simplic
             .
             l.
             2
             q.
             3.
             &
             de
             wirab
             .
             l.
             2.
             6.
             11.
             
          
           
             g
             I
             Sam.
             28.
             19.
             
          
           
             S●v
             definit
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Greg.
             Nyss.
             in
             Macrin
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Theophyl
             .
             in
             Luc.
             16.
             
          
           
             h
             Ex
             Hebraeorum
             sententia
             Pet.
             Mar.
             tyr
             ,
             &
             Paraeus
             .
          
           
             i
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Heb.
             12.
             23.
             
             Q
             〈…〉
             m
             〈◊〉
             Doctores
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             〈…〉
             .
             Che●adam
             .
             alphab
             .
             mystic
             .
             c.
             1.
             
          
           
             k
             Iosh.
             24
             2.
             
          
           
             l
             Ruth
             .
             1.
             16.
             
          
           
             m
             Eorum
             filij
             dieimur
             ,
             quorum
             fidem
             &
             mores
             ●mitamur
             .
             Orig
             〈…〉
             Ezik.
             hom
             .
             4.
             
             &
             6.
             
             Omnes
             hi
             matorcs
             tui
             sunt
             ,
             si
             te
             illis
             dignum
             ges
             .
             seris
             .
             Sen.
             epist.
             44.
             
          
           
             n
             Mat.
             3.
             6.
             
             Rom.
             4.
             16
             ,
             18.
             
             Gal.
             3.
             29.
             
          
           
             a
             Ambulat
             per
             viam
             ,
             per
             quam
             ambulauerunt
             pa●res
             c●us
             .
             Hebr.
             ex
             Psal.
             49.
             19.
             
             O
             〈…〉
             st
             .
             sup
             .
             Vse
             1.
             
          
           
             b
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             Iosh.
             23.
             14.
             1
             
             King
             2.
             2.
             
          
           
             c
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Antiphan
             .
             St●b
             .
             cap.
             124.
             
          
           
             d
             Consecuturi
             prae
             misimus
             .
             Senec.
             ad
             Marc.
             c.
             19
             Eô
             cito
             peruenturi
             ,
             qu●
             illi
             peruenerint
             .
             Idem
             ep
             .
             63.
             2
             
             Sam.
             11.
             23.
             
          
           
             *
             Gen.
             45.
             58.
             
             &
             46.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             e
             Mutamus
             amicos
             ,
             non
             r●linqu●m●
             .
             Hieron
             .
             in
             Nepot
             .
          
           
             f
             Praestolatur
             n●s
             Ecclesia
             primitiuorum
             :
             de
             siderant
             no●
             sancti
             ;
             expectant
             nos
             iusti
             .
             Desideremus
             ergò
             de
             siderantes
             nos
             :
             pr●p●remu●
             ad
             praestolātes
             nos
             :
             expectantes
             nos
             votis
             prae
             〈…〉
             upemus
             .
             Bern.
             de
             temp
             .
             98.
             
             Vse
             2.
             
          
           
             g
             Equidem
             efferor
             studio
             patres
             vestros
             ,
             quos
             colu●
             &
             dilex●
             ,
             vid
             ndi
             .
             Neque
             verò
             eos
             solum
             conu●nire
             aueo
             ,
             quos
             ipse
             cognoui
             ,
             sed
             illos
             etiam
             de
             quibus
             audiut
             &
             legi
             .
             Cie
             .
             de
             .
             sen.
             
          
           
             h
             Psal.
             119.
             63.
             
          
           
             i
             Rom.
             4.
             12.
             
          
           
             k
             Luke
             .
             16.
             22.
             
          
           
             l
             Matth.
             8.
             11.
             
          
           
             m
             Hebr.
             13.
             7.
             
          
           
             n
             N●m
             23.
             10.
             
          
           
             o
             Imp●s
             &
             foelix
             si●
             simul
             esse
             cu
             〈…〉
             t
             ,
             V
             〈…〉
             ,
             ius
             esse
             ,
             velit
             tamen
             ess●
             bea●us
             :
             Quod
             nitura
             negat
             ,
             〈◊〉
             ratio
             patitur
             .
             De
             Maeria
             .
             apud
             Iul.
             Capitol
             .
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Isidor
             .
             Pel.
             l.
             〈◊〉
             .
             epist.
             168.
             
             Bonum
             quaeris
             ;
             malum
             facis
             ;
             in
             contrarium
             curris
             :
             quando
             pernenis
             ?
             Aug.
             nom
             .
             de
             Stoic
             .
             &
             Epic.
             c.
             3.
             
          
           
             p
             Hebr.
             13.
             17.
             
          
           
             q
             Philip.
             2.
             17
             ,
             20.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A01523-e36900
           
             *
             Craesus
             apud
             Herodot
             .
             lib.
             1.
             
          
           
             †
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             “
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .